Home

Programming and Operating Manual - Service, Support

1. O Changeover DIAHON DIAN9 DIANOF element IETA ZOOM a Programming and Operating Manual Turning 216 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 An element was selected using the cursor keys This softkey enlarges the image section of the selected element Zooms the graphic in out automatically When you select this softkey you can move the red cross hair with the cursor keys and choose a picture detail to display When you deactivate this softkey the input focus is positioned in the contour chain again If you press this softkey help graphics are displayed in addition to the relevant parameter Pressing the softkey again exits the help mode A 12 1 Programming a contour Operating sequence 1 Select the desired operating area PROGRAM MANAGER 2 Select this softkey Press this softkey to toggle between the selections This softkey functions the same as pressing the following key Defines a pole for contour programming in polar coordinates The pole can only be entered in absolute Cartesian coordinates Exits the contour editor and returns to the program editor window without transferring the last edited values to the main program Saves the settings for the start point cae A 3 Select a program with the cursor keys l 4 Press this key to open the program u 5 Press this softkey to open the contour editor m Cont m i EEGA Start point Alter native Spec for facing axis
2. Number of idle passes enter without sign REAL Thread lead as a value enter without sign I I the unit is defined in parameter PITA VARI Definition of the machining type for the thread Values 300101 external thread with linear infeed 300102 internal thread with linear infeed 300103 external thread with degressive infeed 300104 internal thread with degressive infeed NUMTH Number of thread turns enter without sign vet REAL Variable retraction path based on initial diameter incremental enter without sign PSYS Internal ae only the default value 0 is possible Values o O O PSYS Internal Same only the default value 0 is possible Values O PSYS INT Internal parameter only the default value 0 is possible Values O O PSYS INT Internal ae only the default value 0 is possible Vaes S o PSYS Internal E only the default value 0 is possible Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 185 Data type Ee PSYS Internal parameter only the default value 0 is possible Values OO i woo Internal parameter only the default value 0 is possible mr g OO a Unit of parameter PIT thread pitch Values 1 pitch in mm revolution 2 pitch in threads per inch TPI PSYS STRING Internal aa only the default value 0 is possible Values o Y O PSYS STRING Internal oo only the default value 0 is possible Values o STRING Internal main only the default val
3. SHIFT ALARM Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 43 vo C 44 Press this key to view the extended softkeys Set up a direct connection on the control system through the following softkey operations 1y Serv Service Direct displ control connect The following dialog pops up on the screen Link set up IP address 169 254 11 22 Subnet mask 255 255 60 6 Start the Access MyMachine P2P PC on your PC PG A password setting dialog appears when the tool is started for the first time Enter a desired password in the input fields and then click this button to save This password ensures that all the connection data for AMM is encrypted The password can be subsequently changed at any time from the menu bar Select the direct connection option in the following dialog and then click this button Available connections Direct Connection 169 254 11 22 7 Direct Connectoni 169 294 11 22 Control information Direct Connection 192 168 215 1 Control IP 169 New network connection _ Control name not possible direct connection Remote display IP 169 24 112 Port 5900 An attempt is made to establish a direct connection If you have not established any authentication data the following dialog appears Authentication Please select login here and enter password key file Password PTTTiiti ft or Key file El Save authentication Select th
4. Start point xX 6 606 abs Z 6 606 abs Approach start pt GB O Trans to next element CHR O 6 668 d a O f Cancel Free text input Changeover DIAMON DIAM96 DIAMOF sioner Ere ES Sa LOOT You will find a guide to defining the start point in Section Defining a start point Page 218 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 217 Recompile pez When the program edited in the contour editor is opened in the program editor if you position the Ed comp editor cursor in a command line of the contour program and then press this softkey the main screen of the contour editor opens and you can recompile the existing contour Note When recompiling only the contour elements that were generated in the contour editor are created again Any changes you made directly in the program text are lost however you can subsequently insert and edit user deinfed texts which will not be lost A 12 2 Defining a start point When entering a contour begin at a position which you already know and enter it as the starting point Operating sequence 1 Select the desired operating area PROGRAM MANAGER 2 Enter the desired program folder 3 Select a program file and press this key to open it in the program editor B 4 Press this softkey to open the contour editor window Cont 5 Use the cursor keys on the PPU to switch between different input fields ARTERE 6 Press this softkey
5. The control system automatically creates starting and end labels from the name entered and the program jumps to the contour editor Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Use the following softkey to confirm your input and return to the screen form for this cycle Tech interface Examples NPP CONTOUR 1 The rough turning contour is the complete program CONTOUR 1 NPP START END The rough turning contour is defined as a section in the calling program which starts from the block containing label START to the block containing label END MID infeed depth The MID parameter is used to define the maximum possible infeed depth for the roughing process The cycle automatically calculates the current infeed depth used for roughing With contours containing relief cut elements the roughing process is divided by the cycle into individual roughing sections The cycle calculates a new current infeed depth for each roughing section This infeed depth is always between the programmed infeed depth and the half of its value The number of required roughing steps is determined on the basis of the total depth of a roughing section and of the programmed maximum infeed depth to which the total depth to be machined is distributed equally This provides optimum cutting conditions For roughing this contour the machining steps shown in the illustration result See the following illustration for the ex
6. Remark If G94 instead of G95 was active before a new appropriate F value must be written See the following illustration for constant cutting rate G96 py SD spindle speed D1 D2 diameter D1 x SD1 D2 x SD2 Dn x SDn constant Rapid traverse With rapid traverse GO there is no change in speed Exception If the contour is approached at rapid traverse and the next block contains an interpolation type G1 or G2 G3 CIP CT contour block then the speed for the contour block is applied already in the approach block with GO Upper speed limit LIMS During machining from large to small diameters the spindle speed can increase significantly In this case it is recommended to program the upper spindle speed limitation LIMS LIMS is only effective with G96 and G97 By programming LIMS the value entered into the setting data SD 43230 SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS is overwritten This SD takes effect when LIMS is not written The upper limit soeed programmed with G26 or defined via machine data cannot be overwritten with LIMS Deactivate constant cutting rate G97 The function Constant cutting rate is deactivated by G97 If G97 is active a programmed S word is given in RPM as the spindle speed If no new S word is programmed the spindle turns at the last defined speed with G96 function active Programming example N10 M3 S1000 Spindle s direction of rotation N20 G96 S120 LIMS 2500 Activate constant cutting speed
7. Subroutine name Subroutine GOO X55 0 AU content G18 G90 GO X16 ZO G1 x20 Zaz A 15 K1G9 2 4 16 493 RND 2 5 TAZ RND 2 5 X30 CHR 1 LA So X40 CHR 1 Z X50 M2 end of contour Programming example 4 DEMO SUB A The following is an example of the turning part program 196 25 00 055 00 000000 r200 00000 0 00000 1 00000 1 Q0000 2000 00000 3 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 GOO G90 G95 G40 G71 LIMS 4500 TL DL G96 S250 M03 MOS GOO X60 ZO GUL X4 FO 35 GOO Z2 GOO X60 CYCLE9S SUB PART 1 1 50000 0 20000 0 10000 0 50000 0 30000 0 20000 TA DA G90 S250 MOS MUB CYCLEYS SUB PART L 2 0 50000 p 0 20000 0 40000 0 30000 0 20000 Gy 4 M30 Subroutine name SUB PART 1 Subroutine content G18 G90 GO ZO X16 G1 Z 2 X20 Z 20 X35 RND 2 Z 50 RND 2 X55 CHR 2 Z 70 M2 end of contour Subroutine name SUB PART 1 2 Subroutine content G18 G90 GO X35 Z 22 45 G2 A74 T5 K AC 35 G1 Z 49 5 M2 end of contour I AC 89 544 Programming example 5 The following is another example of the turning part program 40 by 9 r i Age aa 8 T F T oar 14 23 NLO GS4G00 G90 G95 G40 G71 N20 LIMS 4500 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 27 00 9 r 197 NSO TL DI N40 G96 5250 M03 M
8. 180 or 270 A tolerance of 3 is required here so that conical threads are also possible these undercuts do not meet the standard in this case Selecting an undercut form When you choose the transition element in the contour programming window you can use the following softkey to select an undercut as a transition element Alter native You can subsequently define the undercut form by toggling between the selections in the corresponding input fields x abs Form F OO RxT H i x H i e In the case of standard thread undercuts the characteristic size of the thread pitch is P The depth length and transition radius of the undercut are calculated according to the DIN standard The metric thread pitches specified in DIN 76 can be used The entry angle can be freely selected in the 30 90 range If the diameter is known when selecting the undercut an appropriate thread pitch is suggested Forms DIN 76 A external control and DIN 76 C internal control are available The program detects the two forms automatically using their geometry and topology Based on the thread undercut according to DIN you can use the general undercut type to create specific undercuts e g for inch threads A 12 6 Specifying contour elements in polar coordinates Functionality The description given above of defining the coordinates of contour elements applies to the specification of positional data in the Cartesian coordinate system Alte
9. 20 inc e RND 2 Press this softkey to select a contour element of straight vertical line Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to confirm e xX 5inc Press this softkey to select a contour element of straight horizontal line Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to confirm e Z 25 inc Press this softkey to access more options Press this softkey to close the contour Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Now you can see the programmed contour in the graphics window AWW _ Jog MPF 1 MPF z tlt 5 lt oe m Example 2 88 00 A Follower Zoom Operating sequence PROGRAM MANAGER Cont Accept element Accept element GENS 1 10 13 46 29 2612 12 15 eaaet tae esl ts hess te p Delete element Zz 8 008 abs O o RA aw Trans to next element RND O 8 808 rae Free text input Hore Contour allowance z A 8 0888 Right O al x Accept Select the desired operating area Enter the desired program folder Select a program with cursor keys and press the following key to open the program in the program editor Press this softkey to open the contour editor Define a start point with the following parameters and press this softkey to confirm e Programming mode DIAMON e 2 0 e xX 0 Press this softkey to select a contour element of straight vertical line Enter
10. Circular interpolation clockwise G2 Kee Laha End point and center point G2 X Z CR F Radius and end point opening angle and center point G2 ARS X Z F opening angle and end point Circular interpolation counter clockwise G3 others as with G2 CIP Circular interpolation through intermediate CIP X Z 11 K1 point F 311 K1 is intermediate point Circular interpolation tangential transition N10 G33 Thread cutting with constant lead N20 CT Z X F circle tangential transition to the previous path segment N10 Constant lead G33 Z K SF cylindrical thread G33 X SF face thread G33 Z X K SF taper thread in Z axis path larger than in the X axis taper thread in X axis path larger than in the Z axis Programming and Operating Manual Turning 234 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Address Significance Value Information Programming assignments Thread cutting increasing lead G33 Z K SF cylindrical thread constant lead G34 Z K F17 123 lead increasing with 17 123 mm rev2 Thread cutting decreasing lead G33 Z K SF cylindrical lead G35 Z K F7 321 lead decreasing with 7 321 mm rev2 Thread interpolation N10 SPOS Spindle in position control N20 G331 Z K S tapping without compensating chuck e g in Z axis RH or LH thread is defin
11. G90 G54 G18 PLDI iG 95 S2000 M03 POA GO X60 Z10 CICLES C PART CONTOURS END l 00000 ZL S1000 M03 FUA CYCLE93 poy TOD S1000 M03 CYCLE 0 00000 7 0 0 M2 PART CONTOUR G18 G90 DIAMON GO ZO XO G1 X12 CHR 1 Z 15 5 X20 Aoa a5 X25 Z 28 5 RND 1 2 X30 CHR 1 Z 36 9 RND 2 Z 38 7 X40 RND 2 Z 46 X50 END T LA 00000 ill COCO 0 00000 0 Q0000 O 0 O 17 00000 67 04 O Ty 7 7 0 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 A U0 005 13 00000 Lerouo0 1400000 300101 Tos Q000 1 0 20000 ONO e oa Zax 00000 100000 Oe 300007 EEA Zs 00000 0 20000 tee oO Oy 0100 0073 0 20000 oF 7 LOO OO 0 01000 193 Programming example 2 The following example describes how to process a cavity profile and how to define the subroutine of a contour with the contour functionality G54 G90 G18 G95 GOX50 Z100 TIDL M4S1500 GOX502Z0 5 GOIX 2E0215 Z2 GOX50 ALUO GOX502Z10 M4S1500 GIPO 2 CYCLE95 CON02 CON02 E 1 1 00000 GOX55 4100 M5 TEDL M35 1L500 GOX502Z10 CYCLE95 CON02 CON02 E 5 1 00000 M30 CONO2 G18 G90 DIAMON GO ZO XO G1 X40 CHR 1 z 20 1 00000 Oe 50000 194 0 20000 O 20000 0 20000 0 20000 Je20000 0 20000 Ue 20000 0220000 0 10000 Der 0000y 0 20000 OU 0000 Programming and Operating Manual Tu
12. T Use this key or move the cursor to confirm your entries A 4 Setting R parameters Functionality The R variables start screen lists the R parameters that exist within the control system You can set or query these global parameters in any program as required Operating sequence 1 Select the desired operating area OFFSET 2 Open the list of R parameters lt D rl 3 Use the cursor keys to navigate in the list and enter the values in the input fields to be modified Note You can search for your desired R variable with the following softkey By default the function searches the R number Search You can press the following softkey to activate the option of searching by R name Define the R name as desired if necessary Show R nahe 4 Use this key or move the cursor to confirm your entries A 5 Setting user data Functionality The User data start screen lists the user data that exist within the control system You can set or query these global parameters in any program as required Programming and Operating Manual Turning 204 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Operating sequence 1 Select the desired operating area eg 2 Open the list of user data GUD data A 3 Use the cursor keys to navigate in the list and enter the values in the input fields to be modified Note You can search for your desired user data with the following softkey AA Search You can press the f
13. Z50 M30 aH CONTOUR EEk CON1 X42Z0 X54Z 13 X58 Z 60 X60 M02 CON1_E CONTOUR ENDS Programming and Operating Manual Turning 60 6FC5398 5DP 10 0BA1 08 2013 8 2 6 Programmable scaling factor SCALE ASCALE Functionality A scale factor can be programmed for all axes with SCALE ASCALE The path is enlarged or reduced by this factor in the axis specified The currently set coordinate system is used as the reference for the scale change Programming SCALE X Z Programmable scaling factor clears old instructions for offset rotation scaling factor mirroring ASCALE X Z Programmable scaling factor additive to existing instructions SCALE Without values clears old instructions for offset rotation scaling factor mirroring The instructions that contain SCALE or ASCALE each require a separate block Notes e For circles the same factor should be used in both axes e ifan ATRANS is programmed with SCALE ASCALE active these offset values are also scaled See the following example of a programmable scale factor Workpiece original Workpiece Z Workpiece Programming example N10 L10 Programmed contour original N20 SCALE X2 Z2 contour in X and Z enlarged 2 times N30 L10 N40 ATRANS X2 5 21 8 N50 L10 N60 M30 Subroutine call see Section Subroutine technique Page 116 Information In addition to the programmable offset and the scale factor t
14. ccccccceecceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeseeeesseeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeas Workpiece clamping settable work offset G54 to G59 G500 G53 G15 ecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes Kinematic transformation cccceccceeccseeeceecceeeeanecceecceueeaneeneeeteeeeaneeneeeeeeeesneeneeeteeeeaneeeeetseetaneeneeteesaneenes Milling on turned parts TRANSMIT ccccccccceeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeeseeeesseeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeeas Cylinder surface transformation TRACYL cccccccsecccesseeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeseeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeessaeeeesaees Linear interpolation Linear interpolation with rapid traverse GO ccccccecccsececeeeeeseececeeceseeeeseeeeeseeeeseueessucessueessaeeeseusesseeesaaees Feedrate F 08 Linear interpolation with feedrate G1 oo cccccccccecccceeeece cece eeeseeceseecesseeeeeeeeeseeeeseeesseeesseeeseeeeseeeesaneesanees Circular interpolation Circular interpolation G2 G3 oo ccc cecccseeeceecceeeeaeeeceeeceneeaeeceeceeneeaeeseeeeaneeaneeseeeeeneeeueeteeetsneeneeeteeeeaneenes Circular interpolation via intermediate point CIP cc cccecccceeccceeeceseececeeeeceeceeseeeesecesseesseeeseeeeseeeesaeees Circle with tangential transition OV sicececsucedenceresssecctoesdocusecneadundsdsbacdveniiest dontenceusndedadeniea lt teenienidedaesre ede Thread cutting Thread cutting with constant lead G33 ee ceccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
15. relative to the spindle zero point N165 Gl X10 N170 GO X34 N175 SPOS IC 90 The spindle turns in a positive direction through 90 from the absolute 180 position ending up in the absolute 270 position N180 G1 X10 N185 GO X50 M30 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 92 6FC5398 5DP 10 0BA1 08 2013 8 9 2 2 Spindle positioning SPOS SPOSA M19 M70 WAITS Further information Further information Positioning with SPOSA The block step enabling or program execution is not affected by SPOSA The spindle positioning can be performed during execution of subsequent NC blocks The program moves onto the next block if all the functions except for spindle programmed in the current block have reached their block end criterion The spindle positioning operation may be programmed over several blocks see WAITS Note If a command which implicitly causes a preprocessing stop is read in a following block execution of this block is delayed until the positioning spindle is stationary Positioning with SPOS M19 The block step enabling condition is met when all functions programmed in the block reach their end of block criterion e g all auxiliary functions acknowledged by the PLC all axes at their end point and the spindle reaches the programmed position Velocity of the movements The velocity and the delay response for positioning are stored in the machine data The configured values can be modified by programming or
16. 5 Press this softkey to calculate the missing end point Accept The abscissa value is displayed in the input field from which the calculator function has been called and the value of the ordinate is displayed in the next input field If the function is called from the part program editor the coordinates are saved with the axis names of the selected basic plane Example The following drawing must be supplemented by the value of the center circle point in order to be able to calculate the point of intersection between the circle sectors of the straight lines oa The missing center point coordinate is calculated using the calculator function as the radius at the p tangential transition is perpendicular to the straight line The radius is located at an angle of 90 clockwise to the straight line defined by the angle Use this softkey to select the appropriate direction of rotation Use this softkey to define the given end point Enter the coordinates of the pole the slope angle of the straight line the ordinate of the end point and the circle radius as the length PP abscissa PP ordinate PP angle A L EP ordinate L length Dianeter programming Result Z 19 499 X 60 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 215 A 12 Free contour programming Functionality Free contour programming enables you to create simple and complex contours A contour editor FKE calcu
17. DT and DAM dwell time and path length These parameters can be used to achieve an interruption of the individual roughing steps after certain distances traversed in order to carry out chip breaking These parameters are only relevant for roughing The parameter DAM is used to define the maximum distance after which chip breaking is to be carried out In DT an appropriate dwell time in seconds can be programmed which is carried out at each of the cut interruption points If no distance is specified for the cut interruption DAM 0 uninterrupted roughing steps without dwell times are created Uninterrupted paraxial cut X DAM Infeed movement _VRT lift off distance Parameter _VRT can be used to program the amount by which the tool is retracted in both axes when roughing For _VRT 0 parameter not programmed the tool will retract by 1 mm Contour definition The contour must contain at least 3 blocks with motions in the two axes of the machining plane If the contour program is shorter the cycle is aborted after the alarms 10933 Number of contour blocks contained in the contour program not sufficient and 61606 Error in contour preparation have been output Relief cut elements can be connected directly one after the other Blocks without motions in the plane can be written without restrictions In the cycle all traversing blocks are prepared for the first two axes of the current plane since only these are involved in the
18. For rotary axes the traversing range can be configured between 0 lt 360 degrees modulo behavior or 360 degrees 360 degrees if there is no modulo axis is present With an appropriate machine design a 3rd axis can be traversed linear simultaneously with the remaining axes If the axis is traversed in a block with G1 or G2 G3 with the remaining axes X Z it does not receive a component of the feedrate F Its speed conforms to the path time of axes X Z Its movement begins and ends with the remaining path axes However the speed cannot exceed the defined limit value If a block is programmed with this 3rd axis only the axis will traverse using the active feedrate F when the G1 function is executed If the axis is a rotary axis the unit of measurement for F is degrees min with G94 or degrees rev of the spindle with G95 For these axes offsets can be set G54 G59 and programmed TRANS ATRANS Programming example The 3rd axis is a rotary axis with the axis identifier C N5 G94 feedrate F in mm min or degrees min N10 GO X10 230 C45 X Z traverse path with rapid traverse C at the same time N20 Gl X12 233 C60 F400 X Z traverse path at 400 mm min C at the same time N30 Gl C90 F3000 Axis C traverses alone to position 90 degrees at a speed of 3000 degrees min Special instructions for rotary axes DC ACP ACN For example for rotary axis A A DC Absolute dimensions approach position directly on the shortes
19. M19 or MO 19 or spindle number lt n gt M lt n gt 19 to the angular position preset with SD43240 SA_M19_SPOS with the position approach mode preset in SD43250 SA_M19_SPOSMODE The NC block is not enabled until the position has been reached M lt n gt 70 Switch the spindle M70 or MO 70 or spindle number lt n gt M lt n gt 70 over to axis mode No defined position is approached The NC block is enabled after the switchover has been performed FINEA Motion end when Exact stop fine reached COARSEA Motion end when Exact stop coarse reached I POENDA End of motion on reaching interpolator stop IPOBRKA A block change is possible in the braking ramp lt axis gt Channel axis identifier lt instant in time gt Instant in time of the block change with reference to the braking ramp Unit Percent Range of values 100 application point of the braking ramp to 0 end of the braking ramp If a value is not assigned to the lt instant in time gt parameter the current value of the setting data is applied SD43600 SA_IPOBRAKE_BLOCK_EXCHANGE Note TBOBRKA with an instant in time of 0 is identical to I POENDA WAITS Synchronization command for the specified spindle The subsequent blocks are not processed until the specified spindle programmed in a previous NC block with SPOSA has reached its end position with exact stop fine WAITS after M5 Wait for the spindle to come to a standstill WAITS after M3 M4 Wait for the
20. M70 WAITS Further information Gear stages 0 Special CUMMING TUMGCONS ses cee ces cece vrcent ead cnteeseyscessveddnesercheeeetnadcesecoa eaes send ceeeenchbsestcedveescesmeentvadcqceseseneveeadece Constant cutting rate G96 G97 oo eccccsccccesceceeeeseaeeeceececeaceceaeeesaueeseaceseaeeesaueeseeesesessaeeesueeeseaeessaees Rounding chamfer Contour definition PFOGrAMIMING a sics cc cntcdeeeccscs sence ceueencceescessesaneenncdseeacciaevanccedsesscesancsaseadedebantedecacendesancelece Tool and tool offset General information WENA lt a 202s20dsnissesabives caisaness osnased oncssaidecsbeudvasdsencaecienadedsusaanetenchildsexssbacvasebacerdsdeseees Tool T turning Tool offset number D tUIMING ccccseeccccessecccececceececsesececsaneecceececseueeessauseesaaseessegeeesseeessaueeessageeessaes Selecting the tool radius Compensation G41 G42 ccc ccccccecccceeeeeeeeeeseeeeseececeeesaeeeseeeeseeeesseeesanees Corner behavior G450 RN rece ata IEEE eee epee EE seperti T tae Se AE P EENT Tool radius compensation OFF G40 cc eccccecccceeecccececeeceeeeceeaeeceseeceseeesseeeeseeeeseueesseeesseeeseeeesaeeessaees Special cases of the tool radius COMPENSATION ccccceecccseeeeceecece cece eeeseececuecessucessueessueeesaeeesseeessnees Example of tool radius compensation TULNING ccceeecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesaeueeeseeeeeeseeeeeeaaeeeesaeees
21. Overview The machine must have been set up for AUTO mode according to the specifications of the machine manufacturer You can perform such operations as program start stop control block search and real time simulation etc Softkey functions pea M gt Pressing MI key on the PPU and then auto key on the MCP allows you to open the following window at os 15 33 12 iM otto 2013 06 26 NC MPFO SIEMENS amp w Reset Rov function MCS Position Dist to go Tale aes Auxiliary function Mx 1 a 4 6 nae MZ1 OS ae ces feedrate 0 8 02 70 Axis 8 08 nn reyv 86 G56 8 Current program MPF Block display Act val Work WCS Act val Hach HCS Ooo efa a D e Zooms in the actual value window 2 Performs the program test dry run conditional stop O block skipping and auxiliary function lock 34 Displays important G functions Displays currently active auxiliary and M functions Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Finds the desired block location Displays the axis feedrate in the selected coordinate system Activates the simulation function Displays the information of part machining time part timer and part counter Corrects a wrong program block Any changes will be Switches over the coordinate system in the actual value stored immediately window Parameters HCS Position Dist to
22. TPI VARI machining type By using the VARI parameter it is defined whether external or internal machining will be carried out and which technology will be used with regard to the infeed when roughing The VARI parameter can assume values between 1 and 4 with the following meaning 4 with constant infeed depth VYN Infeed with constant cutting cross section Infeed 300101 Constantinfeed o 300102 i Constantinfeed o 300103 O Constant cutting cross section SSS 300104 1 Constant cutting cross section SS If a different value is programmed for the VARI parameter the cycle is aborted after output of alarm 61002 Machining type defined incorrectly _VRT variable retraction path The retraction path can be programmed on the basis of the initial thread diameter in the _VRT parameter For _VRT 0 parameter not programmed the retraction path is 1 mm The retraction path is always measured according to the programmed system of units inch or metric Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 189 PSYS the last parameter displayed on the screen This parameter specifies the selection of longitudinal thread face thread or taper thread 0 longitudinal thread a 10 face thread on PIT 20 taper thread a PIT Programming and Operating Manual Turning 190 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Programming example Thread cutting By using this
23. When turning on the CNC and the machine also observe the machine tool manufacturer s documentation since turning on and reference point approach are machine dependent functions Operating sequence 1 Switch on the power supply for the control system and the machine 2 Release all emergency stop buttons on the machine By default the control system is in the REF POINT window after booting mA M NC MPF4 1 PF Reset ROY Reference point T F 5 MA LO 0 00A Eg MZ1o 9 00A F The symbol lt 3 shown next to the axis identifier indicates that the axis is not yet referenced If an axis is not referenced the symbol is always visible in the current machining operating area Programming and Operating Manual Turning 14 6FC5398 5DP 10 0BA1 08 2013 He 3 3 1 3 Press the corresponding axis traversing keys on the MCP to traverse each axis to the reference point If the axis is referenced a symbol appears next to the axis identifier and is visible only in the REF POINT window Pan M Ref Point HC MPF 1 PF Reset ROY HCS Reference point MA le 0 BAA j MZ1e 0 00A i Note that axis traversing directions and axis key functions are defined by the machine manufacturer Setting up Coordinate systems As a rule a coordinate system is formed from three mutually perpendicular coordinate axes The positive directions of the coordinate axes are defined using the so called 3 f
24. cutting process The contour program may contain any motions programmed for other axes their distances to be traversed however will not come into effect during the whole cycle Only straight line and circle programming with GO G1 G2 and G3 are permitted as the geometry in the contour Furthermore it is also possible to program the commands for rounding and chamfer If any other motion commands are programmed in the contour the cycle is aborted with the alarm 10930 Illegal type of interpolation in the stock removal contour The first block with a traversing motion in the current machining plane must contain a motion command GO G1 G2 or G3 otherwise the cycle is canceled and alarm 15800 Incorrect prerequisites for CONTPRON is issued This alarm is also issued if G41 42 is active The starting point of the contour is the first programmed position in the machining plane To machine the programmed contour a cycle internal memory is prepared which can accommodate a certain maximum number of contour elements how many depends on the contour If a contour contains too many contour elements the cycle is canceled and alarm 10934 Contour table overflow is issued In this case the contour must be split over several contour sections and the cycle for each section must be called separately If the maximum diameter is not at the programmed end or starting point of the contour the cycle will automatically add an axis parallel straight line to
25. spindle comes into effect master REP Thread starting point 0 001 359 999 Specified in degrees the thread See G33 when using G33 starting point with G33 will be offset by the specified value SPI n Converts the spindle n 1 number n into the axis axis identifier e g SP1 or C identifier Programming and Operating Manual Turning 244 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Address Significance Value Information Programming assignments specified in degrees the spindle stops at the specified position to achieve this the spindle must provide the appropriate technical prerequisites position control N10 SPOS N10 SPOS ACP N10 SPOS ACN N10 SPOS IC N10 SPOS DC SPOS Spindle position SPOS n Spindle number n 1 SPOSA Spindle position 0 0000 SPOS and SPOSA have the SPOSA lt value gt 359 9999 same functionality but differ in SPOSA lt n gt lt value gt their block change behavior With SPOS the NC block is only enabled once the position has been reached With SPOSA the block is enabled even if the position has not been reached STOPFIFO Stops the fast Special function filling of the STOPFIFO separate machining step buffer memory until STARTFIFO block start of filling Buffer memory full or End of N10 X STARTFIFO Start of fast machining step STOPRE Preprocessing stop program is detected N20 X Special function the buffer N30 X memory is fille
26. used for tool change in JOG and MM modes and PROG_EVENTs starting The number of all workpieces produced since the The time since the last control power up with default starting time values cold restart in minutes The total run time of NC programs in AUTO mode The time since the last normal control power up warm and the run times of all programs between NC start and end of program RESET The timer is set to zero after each power up of the control system restart in minutes The number of workpieces required workpiece Processing time in seconds setpoint Note The timer is automatically reset to zero in case of a control power up with default values Modifying miscellaneous setting data Operating sequence 1 Select the desired operating area OFFSET Catt 2 Open the setting data window SD data 3 Open the window for miscellaneous setting data Hisc 4 Select a group of setting data you desire to modify General Axis specific Channel specific Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 203 5 Use these softkeys to search for your desired setting data with the data number name Search Continue search 6 Position the cursor bar in the input fields to be modified and enter the values You can use the following softkeys to switch to the desired axis when modifying the axis specific setting data Axis Axis
27. value Length of chamfer CHRe Insert chamfer value Side length of the chamfer RND Insert rounding value Radius of chamfer RNDM Modal rounding Value gt 0 Radius of chamfer modal rounding ON This rounding is inserted in all contour corners Value 0 Modal rounding OFF FRC Non modal feedrate for chamfer rounding Value gt 0 feedrate in mm min G94 or mm rev G95 FRCMe Modal feedrate for chamfer rounding Value gt 0 Feedrate in mm min G94 or mm rev G95 Modal feedrate for chamfer rounding ON Value 0 Modal feedrate for chamfer rounding OFF Feedrate F applies to the chamfer rounding Information The chamfer rounding functions are executed in the current planes G18 to G19 The appropriate instruction CHF or CHR or RND or RNDMB is written in the block with axis movements leading to the corner The programmed value for chamfer and rounding is automatically reduced if the contour length of an involved block is insufficient No chamfer rounding is inserted if e more than three blocks in the connection are programmed that do not contain any information for traversing in the plane e ora plane change is carried out F FRC FRCM are not active when a chamfer is traversed with GO If the feedrate F is active for chamfer rounding it is by default the value from the block which leads away from the corner Other settings can be configured via machine data Programming and
28. y RESET Note When using the external execution via RS232 the RS232 interface must not be active for another application This means for example the RS232 interface must not be active through the following operation SYSTEM STEP 7 ALARM gt PLC gt connect 5 5 1 3 Transferring from external through RS232 interface Prerequisites e The tool SinuComPCIN has been installed on your PC PG e The RS232 communication has been successfully established between the control system and the PC PG Note The program files can be transferred only to the system drive N MPF or N CMA therefore before transfer make sure the drive identifier contained in the first line in the program file is N and the target directory in the second line is N_MPF or N_CMA If not you must change manually for example E Test mpf Notepad SEE File Edi aeai wiew Help aar GI0GS4 gt 00 X0 42100 Na GO1Z5 No Z 9193 N4 X 0b Z2 9194 NS 0625 20 MA FA 7 AYR Programming and Operating Manual Turning 42 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Proceed as follows to transfer a part program from external through the RS232 interface 1 Select the desired operating area on the PPU PROGRAM MANAGER 2 Press this softkey to go to the RS232 directory RS232 3 Press this vertical softkey in the RS232 window Receive 4 Press this button on the main screen of SinuComPCIN and select the desired program for s
29. 0BA1 08 2013 e Traverse retraction path in up to three axes with GO e Retraction in the boring axis to the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance by using GO e Retraction to the retraction plane with GO initial drilling position in both axes of the plane Explanation of the parameters For the explanation of the parameters RTP RFP SDIS DP and DPR refer to Section Drilling centering CYCLE81 Page 127 See the following parameters for CYCLE86 DTB dwell time The dwell time to the final drilling depth chip breakage is programmed under DTB in seconds SDIR direction of rotation With this parameter you determine the direction of rotation with which boring is performed in the cycle If values other than 3 or 4 M3 M4 are generated alarm 61102 No spindle direction programmed is generated and the cycle is not executed RPA retraction path along the 1st axis Use this parameter to define a retraction motion along the 1st axis abscissa which is performed after reaching the final drilling depth and oriented spindle stop RPAP retraction path along the boring axis You use this parameter to define a retraction movement along the drilling axis which is executed after the final drilling axis has been reached and oriented spindle stop has been performed POSS spindle position Use POSS to program the spindle position for the oriented spindle stop in degrees which is performed after the final dr
30. 10 N170 X25 N180 TRAFOOF N190 DIAMON Diameter dimensioning N200 G40 Tool radius compensation off N210 GO X80 z100 Retraction in rapid traverse N220 M30 End of program Programming and Operating Manual Turning 68 6FC5398 5DP 10 0BA1 08 2013 Description Without groove wall offset transformation type 512 The controller transforms the programmed traversing movements of the cylinder coordinate system to the traversing movements of the real machine axes e Rotary axis e Infeed axis perpendicular to rotary axis e Longitudinal axis parallel to rotary axis The linear axes are positioned perpendicular to one another The infeed axis cuts the rotary axis With groove wall offset transformation type 513 Kinematics as above but an additional longitudinal axis parallels to the peripheral direction The linear axes are positioned perpendicular to one another The velocity control makes allowance for the limits defined for the rotations Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 69 Groove traversing section In the case of axis configuration 1 longitudinal grooves along the rotary axis are subject to parallel limits only if the groove width corresponds exactly to the tool radius Grooves in parallel to the periphery transverse grooves are not parallel at the beginning and end Longitudinal slot Transverse groove without groove wall offset TRAFO_TYPE_n 512 W
31. 48 666 3 6 You can enter different lengths and radii for each cutting edge see Section Creating a new tool Page 17 for more information Other options for setting up the cutting edges p Reset all offset values of the selected cutting edge to zero eset edge PEIEE Delete the selected cutting edge edge A 2 Setting up the workpiece Overview You need to select the relevant offset panel for example G54 and the axis you want to determine for the offset The following graph is an example about how to determine the work offset in the Z axis F Toolholder reference point M Machine zero point W Workpiece zero machine Workpiece Z actual position machine Work offset Z Figure A 1 Determining the work offset Z axis Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 199 Before measuring you can start the spindle by following the steps in Section Activating the spindle Page 21 Operating sequence WW ie Work OFFSET ka offset Heasure workpiece ps S gt x lt 3 E HAND WHEEL gs 3 4 Set work offset 1 10 11 11 Select the desired operating area Switch to JOG mode Open the list of work offsets Open the window for measuring the work offsets Note that this vertical softkey is active only in JOG mode Press the vertical softkey to select the required measuring direction Traverse the tool which
32. 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 211 Q Square function The X value in front of the input cursor is replaced by the X value R Square root function The X value in front of the input cursor is replaced by the VX value Bracket function X Y Z Calculation examples Input gt Result 100 100 67 3 gt 301 45 S gt 0 707107 wss oo e ES C E 34 3 2 10 34 3 2 10 gt 400 To calculate auxiliary points on a contour the pocket calculator offers the following functions e Calculating the tangential transition between a circle sector and a straight line e Moving a point in the plane e Converting polar coordinates to Cartesian coordinates e Adding the second end point of a straight line straight line contour section given from an angular relation A 11 Calculating contour elements Function You can use the calculator to calculate the contour elements in the respective input screens Calculating a point in a circle 1 Activate the calculator when you are in an input screen Ware 2 Open the lower level menu for contour elements selection A 3 Select the desired calculation function 52 G3 Press this softkey to define the direction of the rotation of the circle R Press this softkey to switch between the diameter programming and radius E programming 4 Enter the circle center the angle of the tangent and the circle radius in the following window CC abscissa EEE 2 A CC ordin
33. Active D number of the read only N10 IF P_TOOL active tool GOTOF MSG Signal max 65 Message text in inverted MSG MESSAGE TEXT characters commas read only separate block N150 MSG Clear previous message OFFN Dimension Only effective with the tool radius N10 OFFN 12 4 specification compensation G41 G42 active RND Rounding 0 010 99 Inserts a rounding with the N10 X Z RND 999 999 specified radius value N11 X Z tangentially between two contour blocks RNDM Modal rounding 0 010 99 Inserts roundings with the N10 X Y RNDM 7 3 999 999 specified radius value modal rounding ON tangentially at the following N11 X Y contour corners special feedrate possible FRCMB N100 RNDM2 0 modal rounding OFF Modal rounding OFF Angle of rotation with 0 00001 Specification in degrees angle See ROT AROT ROT AROT 359 9999 for a programmable rotation in the current plane G17 to G19 SET Set values for the SET Various values from the variable fields specified element DEF REAL up to according to the number VAR2 12 REP 4 5 all of values elements value 4 5 REP the same value from the N10 specified element up to the R10 SET 1 1 2 3 4 4 end of the field R10 1 1 R11 2 3 R4 4 4 SETMS n Define spindle as n Number of the spindle if only N10 SETMS 2 separate master spindle SETMS is set the default master block 2nd spindle
34. After the block search the program will continue from the line with the end point interruption point The same calculations of the basic conditions are carried out On as during normal program operation but the axes do not move Wi Block search without calculation of the basic conditions ithout calculat 6 Make sure the feedrate override is 0 Check that correct tool is in spindle before continuing Programming and Operating Manual Turning 50 6FC5398 5DP 10 0BA1 08 2013 7 Press this key on the MCP and then an alarm 010208 appears for your confirmation whether to continue M A1A288 Ke channel 1 continue program with NC start 13 47 I Auto N MPF 4 MPF SIEMENS 5 Stop function pa 8 Press this key again to execute the program 9 Turn the feedrate override switch on the MCP slowly to the desired value 6 Saving system data Saving data This function saves the NC and PLC data of the volatile memory into a non volatile memory area Prerequisite e A valid system password has been set on the control system e There is no program currently executing Proceed through the following steps to save data A WN 1 Select the desired operating area SHIFT ALARM 5 2 Open the window for data saving ave data J 3 Press this softkey to start saving Do not carry out any operator actions while the data OK backup is running There are two methods to call the saved data Method 1 1
35. Creating a new tool Note The control system supports a maximum of 64 tools or 128 cutting edges Operating sequence 1 Select the desired operating area Tool 2 Open the tool list window id list New 3 Open the lower level menu for tool type selection tool Turning 4 Select a desired tool type with the corresponding softkey tool Grooving tool Drilling tool Tapping tool Hilling tool Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 OK 18 Jf 6 Enter the tool number value range 1 to 31999 preferentially enter a value less than 100 and select the corresponding tool edge position code according to the actual tool point direction in the following windows e Available edge positions for turning tool and grooving tool 1 2 3 and 4 taking new turning tool as an example Hew turning tool e Available edge positions for drilling tool tapping tool and milling tool 5 6 7 and 8 taking new milling tool as an example Hew milling tool la oe E A E Use this softkey to confirm your settings The window below shows the information of the new tool created Type T D O Geometry O Tip a Cy x Z Radius width E 4 666 8 666 6 668 3 Tool type Tool radius Tool number Tip width of the cutting edge which is only active for the grooving tool Cutting edge number Cutting edge direction OO 0O Tool length in the X and Z axes Enter
36. F Functionality The feed F is the path velocity and represents the value of the geometric sum of the velocity components of all axes involved The axis velocities are determined from the share of the axis path in the overall path The feedrate F is effective for the interpolation types G1 G2 G3 CIP and CT and is retained until a new F word is written Refer to Sections Linear interpolation with feedrate G1 Page 73 and Circular interpolation G2 G3 Page 73 to learn more information Programming Pus Remark For integer values the decimal point is not required e g F300 Unit of measure for F with G94 G95 The dimension unit for the F word is determined by G functions e G94 F as feedrate in mm min e G95 F as feedrate in mm rev only relative to the spindle speed Remark This unit of measure applies to metric dimensions According to Section Metric and inch dimensioning settings with inch dimensioning are also possible Programming example N10 G94 F310 Feedrate in mm min N20 G01 X60 Z60 N30 M5 N40 S200 M3 Spindle rotation N50 G95 F0 8 Feedrate in mm revolution N60 G01 X100 2100 N70 M30 Remark Write a new F word if you change G94 G95 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 72 6FC5398 5DP 10 0BA1 08 2013 Information The G group with G94 G95 also contains the functions G96 G97 for the constant cutting rate These functions also influence the S word 8 3 3 Linear interp
37. G64 velocity behavior Block change enable for coarse for fine G601 fine Programming and Operating Manual Turning 84 6FC5398 5DP 10 0BA1 08 2013 Programming example N5 G602 Exact stop window coarse N10 GO G60 210 Exact stop modal N20 X20 ZO G60 continues to act N30 X30 2 40 N40 M3 S1000 N50 G1 G601 X35 2 50 F0 12 Exact stop window fine N60 G64 Z 65 Switching over to continuous path mode N70 X40 2 70 N80 GO G9 Z 80 Exact stop acts only in this block N90 X45 2 90 Again continuous path mode N100 M30 Remark The G9 command only generates exact stop for the block in which it is programmed G60 however is effective until it is canceled by G64 Continuous path control mode G64 The objective of the continuous path control mode is to avoid deceleration at the block boundaries and to switch to the next block with a path velocity as constant as possible in the case of tangential transitions The function works with look ahead velocity control over several blocks For non tangential transitions corners the velocity can be reduced rapidly enough so that the axes are subject to a relatively high velocity change over a short period of time This may lead to a significant jerk acceleration change The size of the jerk can be limited by activating the SOFT function Programming example N10 G64 Gl Z5 FO 15 M3 S800 Continuous path mode N20 X20 ZO Continuous path control mode continues to be active
38. H3 2 7193 T p 6 If desired you can use this softkey to specify how you want the program to be executed For more rog i Nc A A information of the program control refer to Section Program control Page 37 7 Press this key to execute the program The program is reloaded continuously PA Either at the end of the program or after pressing the following key the program is automatically removed from the control system 5 5 2 3 Transferring from external through Ethernet connection There are two methods available for transferring a program file from an external PC to the control system through the Ethernet connection Method 1 Prerequisites e The AMM tool has been installed on your PC e An Ethernet connection either direct connection or network connection has been established between the control system and the PC After an Ethernet connection is established you can have a remote access to the NC file system with the AMM tool Programming and Operating Manual Turning 48 6FC5398 5DP 10 0BA1 08 2013 Operating sequence NR Method 2 Prerequisites Open the main screen of the AMM tool on your PC Select a desired program file to be transferred for example Test mpf from the PC file system MM Access MyMachine P2P PC No project active File Edit View Connection Remote control Bookmarks Settings Project Help E File system of the PC Path LA DVD RAM Drive E A E e Ton cn00
39. M Tool change je 8 3 Eal snog Spindle speed a 5 E x cosoo Delete _ Spindle direction QO Activate WO QO l a E E ER Other M function 5 pEi Es ol Press CYCLE START to activate above functions ewe For calculating the four basic arithmetic operations are available as well as the functions sine cosine square root A bracket function is provided to calculate nested terms The bracket depth is unlimited squaring and If the input field is already occupied by a value the function will accept this value into the input line of the pocket calculator C Pressing this softkey empties the input line of the calculator Delete After inputting a desired arithmetic statement in the input line of the calculator pressing this key starts the E calculation The result is displayed in the pocket calculator Selecting this softkey enters the result in the input field at the current cursor position and closes the ccept pocket calculator automatically amp Pressing this softkey aborts the calculation result if any and exits the pocket calculator Back Characters that may be entered care Basic arithmetic operations S Sine function The X value in degrees in front of the input cursor is replaced by the sin X value O Cosine function The X value in degrees in front of the input cursor is replaced by the cos X value Programming and Operating Manual Turning
40. N20 1st block with G33 N10 Axis velocity With G33 threads the velocity of the axes for the thread length is determined on the basis of the spindle speed and the thread lead The feedrate F is not relevant It is however stored However the maximum axis velocity rapid traverse defined in the machine data can not be exceeded This will result in an alarm Information Important e The spindle speed override switch should remain unchanged for thread machining e The feedrate override switch has no meaning in this block 8 5 2 Programmable run in and run out path for G33 DITS DITE Functionality The run in and run out path must also be traversed to the required thread with thread G33 The starting and braking of the axis both axes in case of a tapered thread are performed in these areas This path depends on the thread lead spindle speed and the axis dynamics configuration If the available path for run in or run out is limited it may be necessary to reduce the spindle speed so that this path is sufficient In this case the run in and run out paths can be specified separately in the program to achieve favorable cutting values and short machining times or to simplify the handling of this issue If no values are specified the values from the setting data SD apply The specifications in the program are written into SD42010 THREAD_RAMP_DISP 0 1 If this path is not sufficient for the traversing with the configured a
41. Operating Manual Turning 96 6FC5398 5DP 10 0BA1 08 2013 Chamfer CHF or CHR A linear contour element is inserted between linear and circle contours in any combination The edge is broken See the following illustration for inserting a chamfer with CHF using the example between two straight lines N10 G1 CHF Angle bisector See the following illustration for inserting a chamfer with CHR using the example Between two straight lines N10 G1 CHR re Angle bisector Programming examples of chamfer N10 N20 N30 N40 N50 N60 N70 N80 N90 GO X100 2100 G94 F100 Gl X80 CHF 5 X50 Z60 X40 z750 Gl X30 CHR 7 X10 220 XO ZO Gl FRC 200 X100 CHR 4 X120 220 N100 M30 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Insert chamfer with chamfer length of 5 mm Insert chamfer with leg length of 7 mm Insert chamfer with feedrate FRC 97 Rounding RND or RNDM A circle contour element can be inserted with tangential connection between the linear and circle contours in any combination See the following illustration for examples for inserting roundings Straight line straight line enh neers Rounding Rounding N10 G1 RND N50 G1 RND Programming examples for rounding N10 GO X100 Z100 G94 F100 N20 Gl X80 RND 8 Insert 1 rounding with radius 8 mm feedrate F N30 X60 270 N40 X50 Z50 N50 Gl X40 FRCM 200 RNDM 7 3 Modal roundin
42. Press this key while the control system is booting 2 Select Reload saved user data in the setup menu A 3 Press this key to confirm Method 2 aN 1 Select the desired operating area SHIFT ALARM Start 2 Open the window for selecting the start up modes up wc 3 Select this softkey HC Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 51 4 Use the cursor keys to select the third start up mode as follows gO Standard power up G Pover up with default data J 5 Press this softkey to confirm The control system restarts with the saved data OK Overview of the system data management operating area SYSTEM fh A SHIFT ALARM Pressing the above key combination allows you to open the following window This operating area includes functions required for parameterizing and analyzing the NCK the PLC and the drive all 15 34 66 Ref Point 2013707725 Machine configuration Set password Axis index Nane Axis type Drive number 1 HX1 Linear axis Change 3 HZ1 Linear axis password 4 MSP1 Spindle Delete password Change language 0000 data BAL Start fion Mach Drive m Sys y Optim access levels Sets the system machine data Changes the password as per the corresponding access levels Configures the connected drives and motors Deletes the current password Provides PLC commissioning and
43. REAL Thread depth enter without sign Finishing allowance enter without sign Infeed angle Run in path enter without sign Run out path enter without sign l ian Range of values gt 0 Infeed along the rear flank lt 0 Infeed along the front flank 0 Infeed at a right angle to the cutting direction Programming and Operating Manual Turning 180 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 NSP_ REAL Starting point offset for the first thread turn enter without sign NRC OOO O N Number of roughing cuts enter without sign ND OO IN Number of idle passes a without sign PP1 REAL Thread lead 1 as a value enter without sign OOOO PP3 REAL Thread lead 3 as a value enter without sign VARI Definition of the machining type for the thread Range of values 1 4 NUMTH Number of thread turns enter without sign er REAL Variable retraction path based on initial diameter incremental enter without sign Function This cycle can be used to produce several cylindrical or tapered threads in succession The individual thread sections can have different leads whereby the lead within one and the same thread section must be constant See the following illustration for CYCLE97 Sequence Position reached prior to cycle start Starting position is any position from which the programmed thread starting point run in path can be approached without collision The cycle creates the following sequence of motions e Approach
44. Special handling of tool Miscellaneous function A fUNCTION cece eee compensation LUMMING eesriided a iari aeii IY IR Pree E E E A E EA E E E E E Arithmetic parameters LUD and PLC variables ccccccccececeeeeeneeneeeteeseeneeaneeseeeeaneeeneeteeeeaneeaneeseestanes Arithmetic parameter R Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 8 14 2 LocalUser Data LUD j deere rere etree ree ere ee ee eee ene eee eee ee eee ee eee 8 14 3 Reading and writing PLC Variables cccccccceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesaeeeesseeeeesaeeeeeaeeeeeas 8 15 OOM WENN S ticutaeeoe AE wceusaadomadehdwtietaabesitntesin 8 15 1 Unconditional program JUMPS cs cconscresonetdaoctanslarnendddouiseiasneedanvueseiaaiemadd ui Eaa Sa 8 15 2 COMGIMO Mal programi JUMPS sc hcece ces cccedecnccssenecensneccanesgscacausedeanccncseeacesumecacgngenanecnadecacensssasenseeeanstesnecaauaaicenss 8 15 3 Program example for JUMPS ixscx enecascsendsacteicesacdsubaeedesGenteed pans evcddencuseliveeuddsGuedundunasucdedvewncdseneeeddeiaessecsenescce 8 15 4 Jump destination for program JUMPS cccccecccceececeeceeseeeeceeeeseececeeceeseeeeseeeesecesseeeeseeceseeeessneetsneeesaeeees 8 16 SUDOUNNE tECNMGUG sesser eee eee ne ee nee EEE EEEE ee en eee RE 8 16 1 SSMS Fall RON WOM EEE E E E T ne aude Petit tae Oe EEE Pn eeddet een ed E 8 16 2 Calling Machining cycles tUNING cccccceeeceeee
45. a i a aa o a eei 9 5 7 Thread chaining CYCLE98 cc ccccccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeesseeeeesaeeeessaeeeesaeeeesseneeesaanees 9 5 8 Thread cuting CYCLUE99 AME eee neces te nnn eee ee ere oon eee ne ee ne ee ene ee ee 9 6 Error messages and error NANNING ieccdisciscmiorvredeetivemtertdehtaciivaersiecdsieuitientateerieddwatiwatsiesibiduatiurbeienietiuadys 9 6 1 General POM ON as satccce sacednate ce aceieaactoeanteaddnacaneedceeneesuaesasnel AR a a Aas 9 6 2 Error handling in the CYCIOS cccccccsscccssececsececeuceceeeccesececsuceseueeseeceeecesseesegeessaeceneseseusessuessnaeseneeseneas 9 6 3 Overview of cycle alarms exci scstep ete seeeteccentuseecscee Pen dtedudeh cbceutnaseecadekeidseteadthde veld teieuina eterna ceed taeee eee eediees 9 6 4 Messages in the cycles vera xicsitnassictesamctenccansuidesadotsadeutiatecamwtsainasdineigedviiadaitintogimevierasteiigadeietenticiasiawiieaans 10 Typical tuming Progra sesiis aa ew peewee sean stewie i aa TRENA A Tira anaia E A PON e AEE AE A E A E EAE E AE E EAEE E NEA A 1 Creating a NEW cutting CAGE 2 0 cececcccceeeeeeeeeeee eee eeee see eeees ences eA ene ee A Adee As Ga eee ssa Seesa aS eeesaaeeesaaeseesaaeeeesaaeeneas A 2 Setting up the workpiece a saccisti ened ne scncensasncedanasesienntaenscdireten ces baiesaneressese enncadanenancechavecadereagdesstasncedenegadeeont A 2 1 Entering modifying work offsets a 20ccc2500csasssecceeanencdensoedscanadesesanicanede
46. along a flank NSP starting point offset and NUMTH number You can use this parameter to program the angle value defining the point of the first cut of the thread turn at the circumference of the turned part This involves a starting point offset The parameter can assume values between 0 and 359 9999 degrees If no starting point offset has been specified or the parameter has been omitted from the parameter list the first thread turn automatically starts at the zero degree mark 0 degree marker i Start i Start 1st thread 4t thread Start Start 2 thread 3 thread NUMTH 4 Use the NUMTH parameter to define the number of thread turns with a multiple turn thread For a single turn thread the parameter must be assigned zero or can be dropped completely in the parameter list Programming and Operating Manual Turning 188 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 The thread turns are distributed equally over the circumference of the turned part the first thread turn is determined by the NSP parameter To produce a multiple turn thread with an asymmetrical arrangement of the thread turns on the circumference the cycle for each thread turn must be called when programming the appropriate starting point offset PIT thread pitch and PITA unit of thread pitch The thread lead is an axis parallel value and is specified without sign The unit of it is defined in parameter PITA PITA 1 pitch in mm revolution 2 pitch in threads per inch
47. and be larger than 1 n Optional 2nd parameter for the TRACYL data block 1 preselected or 2 Slot side compensation Optional 3rd parameter whose value for TRACYL is preselected using the mode for machine data Value range 0 Transformation type 514 without groove wall offset as previous 1 Transformation type 514 with groove wall offset TRAFOOF Transformation OFF BCS and MCS are once again identical OFFN Offset contour normal Distance of the groove side from the programmed reference contour Note An active TRACYL transformation is likewise deactivated if one of the other transformations is activated in the relevant channel e g TRANSMIT OFFN address Distance from the groove side wall to the programmed path The groove center line is generally programmed OFFN defines the half groove width for activated milling cutter radius compensation G41 G42 Programming OFFNe distance in mm Note Set OFFN 0 once the groove has been completed OFFN is also used outside of TRACYL for offset programming in combination with G41 G42 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 66 6FC5398 5DP 10 0BA1 08 2013 Example Tool definition The following example is suitable for testing the parameterization of the TRACYL cylinder transformation Program code Comment Tool parameters Meaning Number DP SoC DELL Li L20 Tool type Milling tool STC DP2 1 1 0 Cutting edge position Only for turning tools Program code
48. applicable for the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED T turning or SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED M milling control system PPU161 2 horizontal panel layout SINUMERIK 808D NCEDT 5 HOOP Aog Baod dadog onoo nasg Hegon aoe upong Gee HEROES Bee Baa Sch CS BNO See EDN PAE y PPU160 2 vertical panel layout SIEMENS SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED T POK RDY TEMP a n oA bea Ti ea hi pe oe Oe ia 1 1 2 Control elements on the PPU Elements on the PPU Panel Processing Unit front The following illustration uses PPU161 2 as an example to show control elements available on the PPU Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 T SIEMENS SINUMERIK80s0 ADVANCED T z mi Vertical and horizontal softkeys On board wizard key Calls specific menu functions Provides step by step guides on basic commissioning and operation procedures Returns to the next higher level menu Calls help information Menu extension key Cursor keys Opens the next lower level menu or navigate between the menus of the same level Alphabetic and numeric keys Operating area keys Control keys USB interface Alarm cancellation key Status LEDs Cancels alarms and messages that are marked with this symbol For more information refer to the table below Further information Alphabetic and To enter the upper character on an alphabetic numeric key keep the following key numeric k
49. below Deselect modal J 6 Press this softkey to confirm your input To cancel the input press the softkey below OK Cancel Recompiling Recompiling of program codes serves to make modifications to an existing program using the cycle support Re Position the cursor on the line to be modified and press this softkey This reopens the input screen from z conp which the program piece has been created and you can modify and accept the values 9 4 Drilling cycles 9 4 1 General information Drilling cycles are motional sequences specified according to DIN 66025 for drilling boring tapping etc They are called in the form of a subroutine with a defined name and a parameter list They all follow a different technological procedure and are therefore parameterized differently The drilling cycles can be modally effective i e they are executed at the end of each block which contains motion commands There are two types of parameters e Geometrical parameters e Machining parameters The geometrical parameters are identical with all drilling cycles They define the reference and retraction planes the safety clearance and the absolute or relative final drilling depth Geometrical parameters are assigned once during the first drilling cycle CYCLE82 The machining parameters have a different meaning and effect in the individual cycles They are therefore programmed in each cycle separately Programming and Operating Manual Turning 124
50. by synchronized actions Specification of spindle positions As the G90 G91 commands are not effective here the corresponding dimensions apply explicitly e g AC IC DC ACN ACP If no specifications are made traversing automatically takes place as for Dc Synchronize spindle movements with WAITS WAITS can be used to identify a point at which the NC program waits until the spindle programmed with SPOSA in a previous NC block reaches its position Example N10 SPOSA 1 180 SPOSA 1 0 G01 X34 GOO X10 N40 WAITS 1 The block waits until the spindle 1 has reached the position specified in block N10 WAITS can be used after M5 to wait until the spindle s has have stopped WAITS can be used after M3 M4 to wait until the spindle has reached the specified speed direction of rotation Note If the spindle has not yet been synchronized with synchronization marks the positive direction of rotation is taken from the machine data state on delivery Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 93 Position spindle from rotation M3 M4 When M3 or M4 is active the spindle comes to a standstill at the programmed value Direction of rotation Direction of rotation DC AC DC AC Programmable Programmable angle angle There is no difference between Dc and Ac dimensioning In both cases rotation continues in the direction selected by M3 M4 until the absolute end position is reached Wit
51. group and has a Function fixed position in the window To close the window press this softkey once again To display additional G functions use the following keys c PAGE PAGE UP DOWN Auxiliars This window displays the auxiliary and M functions currently active To close the window press this function softkey once again Save This softkey opens the file saving window where you can specify a name and a storage medium for the File program displayed in the MDA window To save your program either enter a new program name in the i input field or select an existing program for overwriting Note If you do not save with this softkey the program edited in MDA mode is actually a temporary file Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 25 Torres Pressing this softkey deletes all the blocks displayed in the MDA window file t E This softkey opens a window where you can select an existing program file from a system directory to oad El file load into the MDA buffer For the explanation of other softkeys in this mode refer to Section Other settings in JOG mode Page 205 3 2 7 Entering modifying the tool wear data Note You must distinguish the direction of tool wear compensation clearly Operating sequence 1 Select the desired operating area OFFSET pan 2 Open the tool wear window lf WEAF A 3 Use the cursor keys to select the required tools and their edge
52. has been measured previously to approach the workpiece in the Z direction Switch to handwheel mode Select a suitable override feedrate and then use the handwheel to move the tool to scratch the required workpiece edge or the edge of the setting block if a setting block is used Select the offset plane to save in for example G54 Enter the distance for example 0 Press this key or move the cursor to confirm your input Workpiece measurement edge T ijy 32 D 14 x Save in G54 Basic offset H 660 mn Length 2 H 6660 mm Distance 8 688 nh Offset Za 6 668 mm Press this vertical softkey The work offset of the Z axis is calculated automatically and displayed in the offset field Repeat the above operations to set the work offset in the X axis Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 A 2 1 Entering modifying work offsets Operating sequence In case of any problems found when testing the tool offset result you can proceed through the following steps to make tiny adjustment of values 1 Select the desired operating area OFFSET 2 Open the list of work offsets The list contains the values of the basic offset of the programmed work offset and the active scaling factors the mirror status display and the total of all active work offsets 2 Use the cursor keys to position the cursor bar in the input fields to be modified and enter the values A mh mh SP 2 GS
53. input field If the function is called from the part program editor the coordinates are saved with the axis names of the selected basic plane Calculating the end point Hore 2 3 MS 4 214 Activate the calculator when you are in any input screen Open the lower level menu for contour elements selection Select the desired calculation function This function calculates the missing end point of the straight line straight line contour section whereby the second straight line stands vertically on the first straight line Press this softkey to switch between the diameter programming and radius Rif programming Press this softkey to define the given end point when the ordinate value is given Press this softkey to define the given end point when the abscissa value is given Press this softkey to define the second straight line which is rotated counter clockwise by 90 degrees against the first straight line Press this softkey to define the second straight line which is rotated clockwise by Ps 90 degrees against the first straight line Enter the PP coordinates angle A EP abscissa ordinate and L length in the respective input fields The following values of the straight line are known Straight line 1 Starting point and slope angle Straight line 2 Length and one end point in the Cartesian coordinate system Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013
54. is performed at each block However for the thread blocks without dry run feedrate a stop is only performed at the end of the current thread block It functions the same as pressing the following key Pi SINGLE BLOCK After activating this option the icon SBL appears immediately in the program status bar and this softkey is highlighted in blue Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 3 7 pov The feedrate override switch also acts on the rapid traverse override active It functions the same as pressing the following key ROV After activating this option the icon ROV appears immediately in the program status bar and this softkey is highlighted in blue Auxiliars Performs program test before real machining by checking the axis movement on the machine It func DFR disables the output of setpoints to spindles and suppresses all auxiliary functions After activating this option the icon AFL appears immediately in the program status bar and this softkey is highlighted in blue Note that the display is toggled between AFL and PRT by pressing the corresponding softkey Only one of these two functions can be active at the same time 5 3 Program test You can test a part program using three different methods before machining pieces Testing the program with dry run With dry run all programmed motion commands are replaced by a defined dry run feedrate refer to Section Enterin
55. last control power up with default values in minutes It is automatically reset in the case of a Control power up with default values e AN_POWERON_TIME Time since the last control power up in minutes It is reset to zero automatically after each power up of the control system Timers that can be deactivated The following timers are activated via machine data default setting The start is timer specific Each active run time measurement is automatically interrupted in the stopped program state or for feedrate override zero The behavior of the activated timers for active dry run feedrate and program testing can be specified using machine data e AC_OPERATING_TIME Total execution time in seconds of NC programs in AUTO mode In AUTO mode the runtimes of all programs between program start and end are summed up The timer is zeroed with each power up of the control system e AC_CYCLE_TIME Runtime of the selected NC program in seconds The runtime between program start and end is measured in the selected NC program The timer is reset with the start of a new NC program e AC_CUTTING_TIME Tool action time in seconds The runtime of the path axes is measured in all NC programs between program start and end without rapid traverse active and with the tool active default setting Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 119 The measurement is interrupted when a dwell time is active The timer is
56. of the compensation for the drill F toolholder reference point Length 1 in Z Turning tools Center hole Switch to G17 for application of a center hole This makes the length compensation take effect for the drill in the Z axis After drilling the normal compensation for turning tools takes effect again with G18 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 103 Programming example N10 T3 D1 Drill N20 G17 Gl F1 ZO M3 S100 Tool length offset effective in Z axis N30 Z 15 N40 G18 M30 Drilling terminated 8 11 4 Selecting the tool radius compensation G41 G42 Functionality A tool with a corresponding D number must be active The tool radius offset cutting edge radius offset is activated by G41 G42 The controller automatically calculates the required equidistant tool paths for the programmed contour for the respective current tool radius G18 must be active See the following illustration for tool radius compensation cutter radius compensation Cutting edge radius Programming G41 X Z Tool radius compensation left of contour G42 X Z Tool radius compensation right of contour Remark The selection can only be made for linear interpolation GO G1 Program both axes If you only specify one axis the second axis is automatically completed with the last programmed value See the following illustration for compensation to the right left of the contour Program
57. of the starting point determined in the cycle at the beginning of the run in path for the first thread turn with GO e Infeed for roughing according to the infeed type defined under VARI Thread cutting is repeated according to the programmed number of roughing cuts The finishing allowance is removed in the following step with G33 This step is repeated according to the number of idle passes The whole sequence of motions is repeated for each further thread turn Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 181 Explanation of the parameters P03 P02 PO1 and DM1 starting point and diameter These parameters are used to define the original starting point for the thread series The starting point determined by the cycle itself and approached at the beginning using GO is located by the run in path before the programmed starting point starting point A in the diagram on the previous page PO2 DM2 and PO3 DM3 intermediate point and diameter These parameters are used to define two intermediate points in the thread PO4 and DM4 end point and diameter The original end point of the thread is programmed under parameters PO4 and DM4 With an inside thread DM1 DM4 corresponds to the tap hole diameter Interrelation between APP and ROP run in run out paths The starting point used in the cycle however is the starting point brought forward by the run in path APP and correspondingly the end point is
58. operations o Sett Time SD data counter OFFSET Window display Times Counter G Parts in total B Q Parts required a 3 Part count a 4 Run tine H668H HAM BBs Cycle time 8660H HAM BBs 6 Cutting time OHHAH HOM OAs Setup tine A019 ZZM Power on time GHHAH 48M AC_TOTAL_PARTS AC_CYCLE_TIME AC_REQUIRED_PARTS AC_CUTTING_TIME Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 121 AC_ACTUAL_PARTS D AN_SETUP_TIME AC_SPECIAL_PARTS is not available for display 4 AC_OPERATING_TIME AN_POWERON_TIME You can also select whether to activate the workpiece counter function through the following operating area p gt gt M gt Time l counter MACHINE AUTO n n 9 Cycles 9 1 Overview of cycles Cycles are generally applicable technology subroutines that you can use to carry out a specific machining process such as tapping These cycles are adapted to individual tasks by parameter assignment Drilling cycles and turning cycles The following standard cycles can be carried out using the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED control system e Drilling cycles CYCLE81 Drilling centering CYCLE82 Drilling counterboring CYCLE83 Deep hole drilling CYCLE84 Rigid tapping CYCLE840 Tapping with compensating chuck CYCLE85 Reaming 1 CYCLE86 Boring CYCLE87 Drilling with stop 1 CYCLE88 Drilling with stop 2 CYCLE89 Reaming 2 e Tur
59. or the following key to toggle between the selections native Enter the desired values as required You can also define a pole for contour programming in polar coordinates by pressing the following softkey Pole The pole can also be defined or redefined at a later time The programming of the polar coordinates always refers to the pole that was defined last SEENE T Save the settings for the start point elenent Pressing this softkey cancels the settings and exits the contour editor Cancel Programming and Operating Manual Turning 218 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 A 12 3 Programming contour element Functionality Once you have defined the contour start point press this softkey and you can begin programming Accept ee EB lenent the individual contour elements from the main screen shown below WA gt gt X AE Start point Spec for facing axis Diameter DIAMON Start point x 8 060 abs Z 8 888 abs Approach start pt GA O More Trans to next element CHR O 6 680 q a O Free text input aeinn ZOOM Opens the window for programming a vertical straight Accesses more softkeys for example line in X direction Opens the window for programming a horizontal Close straight line in Z direction Pole Ree Opens the window for programming an oblique line in Returns to the program editor without transferring the the X Z direction The end point of the line is entered last
60. path Starting with configured axis N10 G33 Z50 K5 DITS 4 with thread G33 acceleration starting with sudden acceleration run in path specified if necessary with axis overload Run out path z Braking with configured axis N10 G33 Z50 K5 DITE 4 with thread G33 acceleration Braking with sudden acceleration specification of run out path with rounding Non modal feedrate for 0 When FRC 0 feedrate F will act For the unit see F and chamfer rounding G94 G95 for chamfer rounding see CHF CHR RND Modal feedrate for When FRCM 0 feedrate F will For the unit see F and chamfer rounding act G94 G95 for rounding modal rounding see RND RNDM GoBack instruction A GoTo operation is performed N10 LABEL17 to a block marked by a label the jump destination is in the N100 GOTOB LABEL1 direction of the program start GoForward instruction A GoTo operation is performed N10 GOTOF LABEL2 to a block marked by a label the jump destination is in the N130 LABEL2 direction of the end of the program Coordinate specified The dimension can be specified N10 G90 X10 Z IC 20 Z using incremental for the end or center point of a incremental dimension dimensions certain axis irrespective of G90 X absolute dimension Jump condition If the jump condition is fulfilled N10 IF R1 gt 5 GOTOF the GoTo operation to the block LABEL3 with the following abe is 5 performed otherwise the next N80 LABEL3 instruction b
61. position from which the contour starting point can be approached without collision The cycle creates the following sequence of motions The cycle starting point is calculated internally and approached with GO in both axes at the same time Roughing without relief cut elements e The paraxial infeed to the current depth is calculated internally and approached with GO e Approach of paraxial roughing intersection point with G1 and at feedrate FF1 e Rounding parallel to the contour along the contour finishing allowance with G1 G2 G3 and FF 1 e Lift off by the amount programmed under _VRT in each axis and retraction with GO e This sequence is repeated until the total depth of the machining step is reached When roughing without relief cut elements retraction to the cycle starting point is carried out axis by axis See the following illustration for the sequence of operation for CYCLE95 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 165 Roughing the relief cut elements e Approach of the starting point for the next relief cut axis by axis with GO When doing so an additional cycle internal safety clearance is observed e infeed along the contour finishing allowance with G1 G2 G3 and FF2 e Approach of paraxial roughing intersection point with G1 and at feedrate FF1 e Rounding along the contour retraction and return are carried out as with the first machining step e f there are further relief cut e
62. program you can produce a metric external thread M42x2 with flank infeed Infeed is carried out with constant cutting cross section At the end of thread a cut out of 7 mm is defined 5 roughing cuts are carried out at a thread depth of 2 76 mm without finishing allowance At completion of this operation two idle passes will be carried out N10 GO G90 X60 2100 G95 Selection of starting position N20 T1 D1 N30 M6 Tool change N40 S1000 M4 Specification of technology values NSO CYCLE99 0 42 35 42 5 7 2 76 Uy Dy O 5 2 4 5 F Cycle call S300 L01 Ty Uy Uy Oy Or Oy Oz Dy Uy Ly oy a 0 N60 GO G90 X100 2100 Approach next position N70 M30 End of program 9 6 Error messages and error handling 9 6 1 General Information If error conditions are detected in the cycles an alarm is generated and the execution of the cycle is aborted Furthermore the cycles display their messages in the message line of the control system These messages will not interrupt the program execution The errors with their reactions and the messages in the message line of the control system are described in conjunction with the individual cycles 9 6 2 Error handling in the cycles Alarms with numbers between 61000 and 62999 generated in the cycles This range of numbers in turn is divided again with regard to alarm responses and cancel criteria The error text that is displayed together with the alarm number gives you more detailed informa
63. programs T i PROGRAM MANAGER 2 Aj 4 gt gt 9 Rename 6 Pi T OK Select the desired operating area Open the desired directory Select the program file that you would like to delete Press this key and the following message appears on the screen Do you want to delete the file selected Press this softkey to confirm the deletion or press the following softkey to cancel Cancel If you want to restore the last deleted file press the following softkey Undo Select the desired operating area Open the desired directory Select the program file that you would like to rename Press the extension softkey to access more options Press this vertical softkey to open the window for renaming Enter a desired new name with the extension in the input field Press this softkey to confirm your entry or press the following softkey to cancel Cancel Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 33 Viewing and executing recent programs tn 1 Select the desired operating area MANAGER Pecend Pa Press this softkey to open the list of recent files Note that even the deleted files are also displayed Ty id e in the list 3 Select the program file that you would like to execute 4 Press this vertical softkey to start executing the selected program Execute To clear the current file list press the following softkey Clear history 5 Automatic machining
64. rotation This parameter determines the direction of rotation with which the drilling operation is carried out in the cycle If values other than 3 or 4 M3 M4 are generated alarm 61102 No spindle direction programmed is generated and the cycle is aborted Programming example Third boring CYCLE37 is called at position XO in the XY plane The drilling axis is the Z axis The final drilling depth is specified as an absolute value The safety clearance is 2 mm Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 147 N10 GO G17 G90 F200 S300 XO Specification of technology values and drilling position N20 D3 T3 213 Approach retraction plane N30 CYCLE87 13 10 2 7 3 Cycle call with programmed direction of rotation of spindle M3 N40 M2 End of program 9 4 11 Drilling with stop 2 CYCLE88 Programming CYCLE88 RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR DTB SDIR Parameters DP REALL Final drilling depth absolute we Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane enter without sign DTB REL Dwell time at final drilling depth chip breakage SDIR Direction of rotation Values 3 for M3 4 for M4 Function The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate to the entered final drilling depth During boring pass 4 a dwell time a spindle stop without orientation M5 and a programmed stop MO are generated when the final drilling depth is reached Pressing the following key traverses t
65. see Programming Manual See the following illustration for G18 Transverse axis Longitudinal axis Contour monitoring relative to the clearance angle of the tool Certain turning cycles in which traversing motions with relief cutting are generated monitor the clearance angle of the active tool for a possible contour violation This angle is entered in the tool compensation as a value in the D offset under the parameter DP24 A value between 1 and 90 degrees O no monitoring without sign must be specified for the angle Longitudinal contour monitoring No contour violation Contour violation When entering the tool clearance angle note that this depends on the machining type longitudinal or face If you want to use one tool for longitudinal and face machining two tool compensations must be used in the case of different tool clearance angles The cycle will check whether or not the programmed contour can be machined using the selected tool If the machining is not possible using this tool the cycle will abort and an error message is output in stock removal or alternatively the contour is continued to be machined and a message is output with undercut cycles In this case the contour is determined by the cutting edge geometry Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 151 If the tool clearance angle is specified with zero in the tool compensation this monitoring will not be perfo
66. spindle to reach its setpoint speed lt n gt lt m gt Number of the spindle to which the synchronization command is to be applied If the spindle number is not specified or if the spindle number is set to 0 WAITS will be applied to the spindle Note Three spindle positions are possible for each NC block Note With incremental dimensions IC lt value gt spindle positioning can take place over several revolutions Note If position control was activated with SPCON prior to SPOS this remains active until SPCOF is issued Note The control system detects the transition to axis mode automatically according to the program sequence Explicit programming of M70 in the part program is therefore essentially no longer necessary However M70 can continue to be programmed e g to increase the legibility of the part program Programming examples Example 1 Position spindle with negative direction of rotation Spindle 1 is to be positioned at 250 with negative direction of rotation N10 SPOSA 1 ACN 250 The spindle is decelerated if necessary and accelerated in the opposite direction to that of the positioning movement Programming and Operating Manual Turning 90 6FC5398 5DP 10 0BA1 08 2013 Figure 8 1 Position specified in degrees Example 2 Spindle positioning in axis mode Program variant 1 N10 GO X100 2100 N20 M3 S500 N30 GO X80 280 N40 G01 X60 Z60 FO 25 N50 SPOS 0 Position control on spindle 1
67. the last drilling depth provided that the latter is greater than the programmed amount of degression e The next drilling strokes correspond to the amount of degression as long as the remaining depth is greater than twice the amount of degression e The last two drilling strokes are divided and traversed equally and are therefore always greater than half of the amount of degression e lf the value for the first drilling depth is incompatible with the total depth the error message 61107 First drilling depth defined incorrectly is output and the cycle is not executed The FDPR parameter has the same effect in the cycle as the DPR parameter If the values for the reference and retraction planes are identical the first drilling depth can be defined as a relative value If the first drilling depth is programmed larger than the final drilling depth the final drilling depth is never exceeded The cycle will reduce the first drilling depth automatically as far as the final drilling depth is reached when drilling only once and will therefore drill only once DTB dwell time The dwell time to the final drilling depth chip breakage is programmed under DTB in seconds DTS dwell time The dwell time at the starting point is only performed if VARI 1 chip removal FRF feedrate factor With this parameter you can enter a reduction factor for the active feedrate which only applies to the approach to the first drilling depth in the cycle
68. the spindle accelerates to 270 r p m clockwise N20 X90 ZO N30 Z 40 N40 M5 N50 M4 S290 N60 G1 X100 250 N70 S450 Z100 Speed change N80 X150 2150 N90 GO z180 M5 Z movement spindle comes to a stop N100 M30 8 9 2 Spindle positioning 8 9 2 1 Spindle positioning SPOS SPOSA M19 M70 WAITS Functionality SPOS SPOSA or M19 can be used to set the spindle to specific angular positions e g during tool change Angular position SPOS SPOSA and M19 induce a temporary switchover to position controlled mode until the next M3 M4 M5 M41 to M45 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 88 6FC5398 5DP 10 0BA1 08 2013 Positioning in axis mode The spindle can also be operated as a path axis synchronized axis or positioning axis at the address defined in the machine data When the axis identifier is specified the spindle is in axis mode M70 switches the spindle directly to axis mode End of positioning The end of motion criterion when positioning the spindle can be programmed using FINEA CORSEA or IPOENDA The program advances to the next block if the end of motion criteria for the spindle or axes programmed in the current block plus the block change criterion for path interpolation are fulfilled Synchronization In order to synchronize spindle movements WAITS can be used to wait until the spindle position is reached Conditions The spindle to be positioned must be capable of operation in position controll
69. the thread If you wish to infeed at a right angle to the cutting direction in the thread the value of this parameter must be set to zero This means that the parameter can be omitted in the parameter list as in this case the value is defaulted automatically with zero If you wish to infeed along the flanks the absolute value of this parameter may amount maximally to the half of the flank angle of the tool The execution of the infeed is defined by the sign of this parameter With a positive value infeed is always carried out along the rear flank and with a negative value infeed is always carried out along the front flank If the value of IANG for tapered threads is nonetheless negative the cycle will carry out a flank infeed along a flank NSP starting point offset You can use this parameter to program the angle value defining the point of the first cut of the thread turn at the circumference of the turned part This involves a starting point offset The parameter can assume values between 0 0001 and 359 9999 degrees If no starting point offset has been specified or the parameter has been omitted from the parameter list the first thread turn automatically starts at the zero degree mark PP1 PP2 and PP3 thread lead These parameters are used to define the value of the thread lead in the three sections of the thread series The lead value must be entered as a paraxial value without sign VARI machining type By using the VARI par
70. this softkey The cycle is then automatically transferred to the program OK editor as a separate block Programming and Operating Manual Turning 130 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 9 4 5 Deep hole drilling CYCLE83 Programming CYCLE83 RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR FDEP FDPR DAM DTB DTS FRF VARI AXN MDEP VRT DTD DIS1 Parameters OP REAL Final drilling depth absolute o DPR _ REAL__ Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane enter without sign Amount of degression enter without sign Values gt 0 degression as value lt 0 degression factor na 0 no degression Dwell time at drilling depth chip breakage Values gt 0 in SBCONDS O e o iO DTS REAL Dwell time at starting point and for chip removal Values gt 0 in seconds SOSO ee ooo Feedrate factor for the first drilling depth enter without sign Range of values 0 001 1 VARI Machining type Chip breakage 0 Chip removal 1 e Values 1 1st geometrical axis ma 2 2nd geometrical axis 3 3rd geometrical axis Variable retraction value for chip breakage VARI 0 Values gt 0 if traction value A 0 retraction value 1mm set Dwell time at final drilling depth Values gt 0 in seconds en lt 0 in revolutions 0 value same as DTB DIS REAL Programmable limit distance for reinsertion in the drill hole for chip removal VARI 1 Values gt 0 programmable value applies 0 automatic calculation Function The tool d
71. to the circle starting point Programming example End point and radius specification Start point End point N5 G90 230 X40 Starting point circle for N10 N10 G2 Z50 X40 CR 12 207 End point and radius Note With a negative leading sign for the value with CR a circular segment larger than a semicircle is selected Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 15 Programming example Definition of end point and aperture angle Start point End point N5 G90 230 X40 Starting point circle for N10 N10 G2 Z50 X40 AR 105 Opening angle and end point Programming example Definition of center point and aperture angle End point N5 G90 Z30 X40 Starting point circle for N10 N10 G2 K10 I 7 AR 105 Opening angle and center point Note Center point values refer to the circle starting point Programming and Operating Manual Turning 76 6FC5398 5DP 10 0BA1 08 2013 8 4 2 Circular interpolation via intermediate point CIP Functionality The direction of the circle results here from the position of the intermediate point between starting and end points Specification of intermediate point 11 for the X axis K1 for the Z axis CIP remains active until canceled by another instruction from this G group GO G1 The configured dimensional data G90 or G91 applies to the end point and the intermediate point See the following illustration for circle with end point and i
72. tool with its offset data The control system performs the required path compensations based on the data to create the described workpiece See the following illustration for machining a workpiece with different tool dimensions F toolholder reference point M machine zero W workpiece zero 8 11 2 Tool T turning Functionality The tool selection takes place when the T word is programmed Whether this is a tool change or only a preselection is defined in the machine data e A tool change tool call takes place directly with the T word e g typical for tool turrets on turning machines or e The change takes place after the preselection with the T word by an additional instruction M6 Note If a certain tool was activated it remains stored as an active tool even beyond the end of the program and after switching off switching on the control system If you change a tool manually input the change also in the control system so that the control system knows the correct tool For example you can start a block with the new T word in MDA mode Programming example Tool change without M6 N10 T1 N20 T3 N30 T2 N40 T6 N50 T7 N60 T5 N70 T588 N80 M30 The control system can store a maximum of 64 tools Programming and Operating Manual Turning 100 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 8 11 3 Tool offset number D turning Functionality It is possible to assign 1 to 9 data fields with different tool offset blocks for mu
73. transferring the last edited Cancel values to the system Contour symbol colors The meaning of the symbol colors in the contour chain on the left of the main screen is as follows Icon Significance Selected Symbol color black on a red background gt Element is defined geometrically Symbol color black on a light yellow background gt Element is not defined geometrically Not selected Symbol color black on a gray background gt Element is defined geometrically Symbol color white on a gray background gt Element is not defined geometrically A 12 4 Parameters for contour elements Parameters for programming straight lines 16 80 37 ig 2012 12 15 Straight line vertical Alter native Trans to next element CHR O 6 668 Free text input All para meters Contour allowance Rance 8 888 Right O an End point X Followe elenent a Zoon a Foon Ee E att Orei Absolute abs incremental inc end position in XorZ direction Transition element to the next contour is a chamfer CHR or a radius RND CHR 0 or RND 0 means no transition element Input field for supplementary comments such as F1000 feedrate values H or M functions If comments are entered as text they must always be started with a semicolon Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 You can specify a side based parallel contour allowance It is displayed as an allowance in the grap
74. 000 PIT POSS 8 0000A SST 266 66608 SST1 266 0900A AXN 3 Q PSYS 8 PSYS B VARI 6 Oo DAH 6 66666 fh 5 Confirm your settings with this softkey The cycle is then automatically transferred to the program OK editor as a separate block 9 4 7 Tapping with compensating chuck CYCLE840 Programming CYCLE840 RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR DTB SDR SDAC ENC MPIT PIT AXN Parameters Data type REAL Retraction plane absolute REAL Reference plane absolute DP REAL Finaldrilling depth absolute S DPR REAL Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane enter without sign Programming and Operating Manual Turning 138 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Direction of rotation for retraction Values 0 automatic direction reversal 3 or 4 for M3 or M4 SY Values 3 4 or 5 for M3 M4 or M5 ENC INT Tapping with without encoder eae Values 0 with encoder 1 without encoder MPIT REAL Thread lead as a thread size signed Range of values O for MO to 48 for M48 Thread lead as a value signed Range of values 0 001 2000 000 mm Tool axis Values 1 1 1st axis of the current plane 2 2nd axis of the current plane 3 3rd axis of the current plane 1 The definition of the 1st 2nd and 3rd axes depends upon the current plane selected Function The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate to the entered final thread depth You use this cycle to perform tapping with the compensati
75. 0BA1 08 2013 8 2 3 Dimensions in metric units and inches G71 G70 G710 G700 Functionality If workpiece dimensions that deviate from the base system settings of the control system are present inch or mm the dimensions can be entered directly in the program The required conversion into the base system is performed by the control system Programming G70 Inch dimensions G71 Metric dimensions G700 Inch dimensions also for feedrate F G710 Metric dimensions also for feedrate F Programming example N10 G70 X10 Z30 Inch dimensions N20 X40 Z50 7 G70 continues to act N80 G71 X19 Z17 3 metric dimensioning from this point on Information Depending on the default setting you have chosen the control system interprets all geometric values as either metric or inch dimensions Tool offsets and settable work offsets including their displays are also to be understood as geometrical values this also applies to the feed F in mm min or inch min The default setting can be set in machine data All examples provided in this manual assume the metric default setting G70 or G71 evaluates all geometrical data that directly refer to the workpiece either as inches or metric units for example e Positional data X Z for GO G1 G2 G3 G33 CIP CT e Interpolation parameters K also thread lead e Circle radius CR e Programmable work offset TRANS ATRANS All remaining geometric parameters that are not direct workpiece para
76. 1 siemens netidfs a WIZARD mp B s System iC db By ese fe CSODOT gt 808D_T i 3 Documents and Settings Intel Program Files B Recycler C System Volume Informat sy lt gt Copy the program file with the toolbar button amp amp keyboard shortcuts Ctrl C or from the context menu Select the program directory in the NC file system Paste the copied file into the current directory with the toolbar button W keyboard shortcuts Ctrl V or from the context menu Registered as User Control type SUD SINUMERIE 8080 oUSD _M IP 172 716 202 196 Path Program HMI root 5 Program i OEM cycles i OEM Files i User Files Alternatively you can transfer the file by simply dragging and dropping it from the PC file system to the NC file system After the file is successfully pasted you can find it in the corresponding directory on the control system e The AMM tool has been installed on your PC e A network connection has been established between the control system and the PC e A network drive which includes the part program to be transferred has been created and connected Operating sequence l PROGRAM MANAGER Hetwo drive ka N Select the desired operating area on the PPU Press this softkey to view the network drive s created Enter the desired network drive which includes the part program to be transferred with this key Programming and Operati
77. 120 m min speed limit 2 500 r p m N30 GO X150 no change in speed because block N31 with GO N40 X50 220 no change in speed because block N32 with GO N50 X40 Approach on contour new speed is automatically set as is required for the beginning of block N40 N60 Gl FO 2 X32 Z25 Feedrate 0 2 mm revolution N70 X50 250 N80 G97 X10 220 Deactivating constant cutting rate N90 S600 new spindle speed r p m N100 M30 Information The G96 function can also be deactivated with G94 or G95 same G group In this case the last programmed spindle speed S is active for the remaining machining sequence if no new S word is programmed The programmable offset TRANS or ATRANS see Section Programmable work offset TRANS ATRANS Page 58 should not be used on the transverse axis X or used only with low values The workpiece zero point should be located at the turning center Only then is the exact function of G96 guaranteed Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 95 8 10 2 Rounding chamfer Functionality You can insert the chamfer CHF or CHR or rounding RND elements into a contour corner If you wish to round several contour corners sequentially by the same method use Modal rounding RNDM You can program the feedrate for the chamfer rounding with FRC non modal or FRCM modal If FRC FRCM is not programmed the normal feedrate F is applied Programming CHF Insert chamfer
78. 2 G3 and G33 parameters 999 999 with G34 G35 Thread 0 001 2000 000 Intermediate point for 0 001 99 Belongs to the X axis See CIP circular interpolation 999 999 specification for circular interpolation with CIP K1 Intermediate point for 0 001 99 Belongs to the Z axis See CIP circular interpolation 999 999 specification for circular interpolation with CIP G96 S LIMS F Subroutine name and_ 7 decimals Instead of a free name itis also L separate block call integer only no possible to select L1 sign L9999999 this also calls the subroutine UP in a separate block Please note L0001 is not always equal to L1 The name LL6 is reserved for the tool change subroutine Additional function 0 99 For example for initiating only integer no switching actions such as sign coolant ON maximum five M functions per block Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 237 Address Significance Value Information Programming assignments MO The machining is stopped at the end of a block containing MO to continue press the following key Programmed stop M1 Optional stop As with MO but the stop is only performed if a special signal Program control M01 is present M2 End of main program with return to Can be found in the last block of beginning of program the processing sequence End of program as M2 Can be found in the last
79. 3 R6 gt SIN R7 R7 R6 greater than or equal to SIN R7 squared Programming example N10 IF R1 GOTOF LABEL1 If RI is not null then go to the block having LABEL1 GO X30 230 N90 LABEL1 GO X50 250 N100 IF R1 gt 1 GOTOF LABEL2 If Rl is greater than 1 then go to the block having LABEL2 GO X40 240 N150 LABEL2 GO X60 Z60 GO X70 270 N800 LABEL3 GO X80 z780 GO X100 2100 N1000 IF R45 R7 1 GOTOB LABEL3 If R45 is equal to R7 plus 1 then go to the block having LABEL3 M30 Several conditional jumps in the block N10 MC1 GO X20 220 N20 GO XO ZO N30 IF R1l 1 GOTOB MC1 IF R1 2 GOTOF MA2 N40 GO X10 210 N50 MA2 GO X50 250 N60 M30 Note The jump is executed for the first fulfilled condition Programming and Operating Manual Turning 114 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 8 15 3 Program example for jumps Task Approaching points on a circle segment Existing conditions Start angle 30 in R1 Circle radius 32 mm in R2 Position spacing 10 in R3 Number of points 11 in R4 Position of circle center in Z 50 mm in R5 Position of circle center in X 20 mm in R6 See the following illustration for linear approach of points on a circle segment R4 11 number of points Point 11 Programming example N10 R1 30 R2 32 R3 10 R4 11 R5 50 R6 20 Assignment of initial values N20 MC1 GO Z R2 COS R1 R5 X R2 SIN R1 R6 Calculation and assignment to axis addresses N30 R1 R1 R3 R4 R4 1 N40 IF R4 gt 0 GOTO
80. 3 If you desire to recompile the cycle press this softkey conp Cavity contour The following example describes how to process a cavity profile and how to define the subroutine of a contour with the contour functionality G500 G18 G95 G0X50 Z100 T5 M4S1500 G0X50Z0 5 G01X 2F0 15 Z2 G0X50 Z100 T2 G0X50210 M4S1500 G1F0 2 CYCLE95 CONO1 0 50000 0 20000 0 20000 0 20000 0 20000 0 20000 0 10000 1 1 00000 G0X55 Z100 M5 T1 M3S1500 G0X50210 CYCLE95 CON02 CONO2_E 0 50000 0 20000 0 20000 0 20000 0 20000 0 20000 0 10000 5 1 00000 M30 REKKKEESEEESE CONTOU eee ee CONO2 7 __DIgK contour definition begin Don t change GP RO HD Programming and Operating Manual Turning 176 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 G18 G90 DIAMON GP GO Z0 X0 GP G1 X28 CHR 3 GP Z 8 477 RND 2 GP G2 Z 45 712 X40 K AC 25 I AC 60 RND 2 GP G1 Z 50 RND 3 GP Z 55 X45 GP CON V64 2 0 0000 0 0 MST 1 2 AX Z X K 1 GP RO HD S EX 0 EY 0 ASE 0 GP RO HD LU EY 28 GP RO HD F LFASE 3 GP RO HD LL GP RO HD R RROUND 2 GP RO HD ACW DIA 209 217 EY 40 CX 25 CY 60 RAD 23 GP RO HD R RROUND 2 GP RO HD LL EX 50 GP RO HD R RROUND 3 GP RO HD LA EX 55 EY 45 GP RO HD End contour definition end Don t change GP RO HD M17 CONO2 Esti tsrettees CONTOUR ENDS 9 5 6 Thread undercut CYCLE96
81. 3 Xabs 5 0 New pole Zpole1 5 0 Xpole1 5 0 Pole 1 Calculated polar coord Predecessor L1abs 3 6603 dabs 0 0 Next point L1inc 2 0 pinc 45 0 Absolute polar coordinates for current element L1abs 1 6603 dabs 45 0 Calculate Cartesian coordinates Zabs 1 1740 Xabs 1 1740 A 12 7 Cycle support Functionality The following technologies are provided with additional support in the form of pre defined cycles which then must be parameterized e Drilling e Turning For more information refer to the Programming and Operating Manual Turning Part 2 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 226 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 A 12 8 Programming example for turning application Example 1 The following diagram shows a programming example for the Free contour programming function Figure A 2 Programming example for turning application Operating sequence ig 1 Select the desired operating area MANAGER 2 Enter the desired program folder 3 Select a program with cursor keys and press the following key to open the program in the program editor u 4 Press this softkey to open the contour editor Cont neem 5 Define a start point with the following parameters and press this softkey to confirm Mean e Programming mode DIAMOF e 2 0 e X 0 6 Press this softkey to select a contour element of straight vertical line AEEEBE T Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to confir
82. 398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 VARI 1 4 Definition of undercut position _V ARI 4 _VARI 3 _VARI 1 _VARI 2 For VARI lt gt 0 the following applies e The actual cutting edge position is not checked i e all positions can be used if technologically suitable The clearance angle of the active tool is monitored in the cycle if an appropriate value is specified in the appropriate parameter of the tool compensation If it turns out that the form of the undercut cannot be machined using the selected tool since its tool clearance angle is too small then the message Changed form of undercut is displayed on the control system The machining however is continued The cycle determines its starting point automatically This is by 2 mm away from the end diameter and by 10 mm away from the finishing dimension in the longitudinal axis The position of this starting point referred to the programmed coordinate values is determined by the tool point direction of the active tool Note Before calling the cycle a tool compensation must be activated otherwise the cycle is aborted after alarm 61000 No tool compensation active has been output Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 163 Programming example Undercut form E This program can be used to program an undercut of form E N10 T1 D1 S300 M3 G95 F0 3 Specification of technology values N20 GO G90 Z100 X50 Selection of starting position N30 CY
83. 4 Select the desired operating area on the PPU MANAGER 5 Enter the program directory iZ Select the program file you desire to back up O T Press this softkey to copy it to the clipboard Copy 8 Enter the RS232 directory RS232 9 Press this vertical softkey in the RS232 window The file transferring starts Send a 10 Wait until SinuComPCIN has finished data transfer and click this button Transter For more information refer to SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Diagnostics Manual 8 Programming principles 8 1 Fundamentals of programming 8 1 1 Program names Each program must have a program name The program name must follow the conventions below e Use a maximum of 24 letters or 12 Chinese characters for a program name the character length of the file extension excluded e Separate the file extension only with a decimal point e Enter the file extension SPF if the current default program type is MPF main program and you desire to create a subprogram e Enter the file extension MPF if the current default program type is SPF subprogram and you desire to create a main program e Do not enter the file extension if you desire to take the current default program type e Avoid using special characters for program names Programming and Operating Manual Turning 54 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Example WORKPIECE527 8 1 2 Program structure Structure and content The NC program consists o
84. 4 G0 G1 FDEP REP Deep hole drilling with chip breakage VARI 0 e Approach of the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance by using GO e Traversing to the first drilling depth with G1 the feedrate for which is derived from the feedrate defined with the program call which is subject to parameter FRF feedrate factor e Dwell time at final drilling depth parameter DTB e Retraction by 1 mm from the current drilling depth with G1 and the feedrate programmed in the calling program for chip breaking e Traversing to the next drilling depth with G1 and the programmed feedrate sequence of motions is continued until the final drilling depth is reached e Retraction to the retraction plane with GO Programming and Operating Manual Turning 132 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Explanation of the parameters For an explanation of the parameters RTP RFP SDIS DP and DPR refer to Section Drilling centering CYCLE81 Page 127 Interrelation of the parameters DP or DPR FDEP or FDPR and DAM The intermediate drilling depth are calculated in the cycle on the basis of final drilling depth first drilling depth and amount of degression as follows e Inthe first step the depth parameterized with the first drilling depth is traversed as long as it does not exceed the total drilling depth e From the second drilling depth on the drilling stroke is obtained by subtracting the amount of degression from the stroke of
85. 51 intersection the control system automatically switches to transition circle This avoids long idle motions 8 11 8 Example of tool radius compensation turning See the following example of tool radius compensation cutting edge radius shown magnified Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 107 Programming example N1 amp COnNntoOur Curt N2 T1 Tool 1 with offset D1 N10 DIAMOF F0 15 S1000 M3 Radius dimension technological values N15 G54 GO G90 X100 Z15 N20 X0 Z6 N30 Gl G42 G451 XO ZO Start compensation mode N40 G91 X20 CHF 5 1 1223 Insert chamfer 30 degrees N50 2 25 N60 X10 2 30 N70 28 N80 G3 X20 Z 20 CR 20 N90 E1220 N95 X5 N100 Z 25 N110 G40 GO G90 X100 Terminate compensation mode N120 M2 8 11 9 Special handling of tool compensation turning Influence of setting data With the use of the following setting data the operator programmer can influence the calculation of the length compensation of the tool used e SD 42940 TOOL_LENGTH_CONST Assignment of tool length components to geometry axes e SD 42950 TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE Assignment of the tool length components independent of tool type Note The modified setting data will become effective with the next cutting edge selection Examples With SD 42950 TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE 2 a milling tool used is taken into account in length compensation as a turning tool e G17 Length 1 in Y axis length 2 in X ax
86. 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 e The drilling position can be programmed either with Z and the C axis or if TRACYL is active with X and Z See the following illustration for drilling on peripheral surface with a driven tool 9 4 3 Drilling centering CYCLE81 Programming CYCLE81 RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR Parameters Data type REAL Retraction plane absolute REAL Reference plane absolute SDIS REAL Safety clearance enter without sign DP REAL Final drilling depth absolute DPR o REAL Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane enter without sign Function The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate to the entered final drilling depth Sequence Position reached prior to cycle start The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane The cycle creates the following sequence of motions Approach of the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance by using GO e Traversing to the final drilling depth at the feedrate programmed in the calling program G1 e Retraction to the retraction plane with GO Explanation of the parameters RFP and RTP reference plane and retraction plane Normally reference plane RFP and return plane RTP have different values The cycle assumes that the retraction plane precedes the reference plane This means that the distance from the retraction plane to the final drilling depth is larger than the distance from the reference plan
87. 6 666668 6 66660 1 66666 6 56666 266 66666 2566 66068 6 26660 6 68666 566 66668 Pi 4 Confirm your settings with this softkey The cycle is then automatically transferred to the program OK editor as a separate block Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 153 9 5 3 Groove CYCLE93 Programming CYCLE93 SPD SPL WIDG DIAG STA1 ANG1 ANG2 RCO1 RCO2 RCI1 RCI2 FAL1 FAL2 IDEP DTB VARI VRT Parameters SPD REAL Starting point in the transverse axis Se fE Setna pantin e gig gay STA o REAL oo o Longitudinal 0 lt STA lt 180 face STA 90 Flank angle 1 on the side of the groove determined by the starting point enter without sign Range of values 0 lt ANG1 lt 89 999 degrees Flank angle 2 on the other side enter without sign Range of values 0 lt ANG2 lt 89 999 Finishing allowance at the flanks IDEP REAL Infeed depth enter without sign i REAL Dwell time at recess base VARI Machining type Range of values 1 8 and 11 NRT REAL Variable retraction distance from contour incremental enter without sign Function The grooving cycle can be used to carry out symmetrical and asymmetrical grooves for longitudinal and face machining at any straight contour elements External and internal grooves can be produced Sequence The infeed in the depth towards the groove base and in the width from groove to groove are calculated in the cycle internally and distr
88. 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 See the following illustration for geometrical parameters Geometrical parameters Reference plane Final drilling depth 9 4 2 Requirements Call and return conditions Drilling cycles are programmed independently of the actual axis names The drilling position must be approached in the higher level program before the cycle is called The required values for feedrate spindle speed and direction of spindle rotation must be programmed in the part program if there are no defining parameters in the drilling cycle The G functions and the current data record active before the cycle was called remain active beyond the cycle Plane definition In the case of drilling cycles it is generally assumed that the current workpiece coordinate system in which the machining operation is to be performed is to be defined by selecting plane G17 and activating a programmable offset The drilling axis is always the axis of this coordinate system which stands vertically to the current plane A tool length compensation must be selected before the cycle is called Its effect is always perpendicular to the selected plane and remains active even after the end of the cycle In turning the drilling axis is thus the Z axis Drilling is performed to the end face of the workpiece See the following illustration for drilling axis when turning Drilling axis Length compensation Programming and Operating Manual Turnin
89. 8 N50 GOO X35 ZO NOU GOL X P0433 N70 GOO Z2 N80 GOO X35 N90 T13 pl N100 G95 S1000 M4 N110 GOO AL XO N1420 CYCLESS 10 00000 0 00000 2 00000 23 00000 0 00000 L0 00000 5200000 y ple00000 Op 1 5 00000 0 00000 0 00000 N130 G18 N140 TLO Dl CYCLE9S PART SUB 2 1 50000 0 20000 0 10000 0 350000 0 30000 0 20000 Il p NoU TLIO DL N40 G96 S250 M03 M08 N50 GOO Z1 XO NGO Gl PUso A 17 CYCLES 1600000 172 900000 4 00000 2 00000 z 4 z 7 w z rLx00000 713 N150 M30 Subroutine name PART SUB 2 Subroutine content N160 G18 G90 N170 GO ZO X27 N180 Gl Z 89 XK24 11 N190 24 9 X16 NZ200 2 21 N210 X10 M2 end of contour A Appendix A 1 Creating a new cutting edge Note You can load the machine with a maximum of 128 cutting edges and create a maximum of nine cutting edges for each tool Operating sequence 1 Select the desired operating area OFFSET Tool 2 Open the tool list window list Programming and Operating Manual Turning 198 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 3 Select the tool to which you desire to add a cutting edge 4 Open the lower level menu for cutting edge settings Edges New 5 Press this softkey to create a new cutting edge for the selected tool The control system edge automatically adds the new cutting edge to the tool list AN a Jog Type T OD Geometry Tip i x Radius width a 11 4 668 4 668 1 6668 4 666 3 a 2 mpa 4 668 4 666
90. B MC1 N50 M2 Explanation In block N10 the starting conditions are assigned to the corresponding arithmetic parameters The calculation of the coordinates in X and Z and the processing takes place in N20 In block N30 R1 is incremented by the clearance angle R3 and R4 is decremented by 1 If R4 gt 0 N20 is executed again otherwise N50 with End of program 8 15 4 Jump destination for program jumps Functionality A label or a block number serve to mark blocks as jump destinations for program jumps Program jumps can be used to branch to the program sequence Labels can be freely selected but must contain a minimum of 2 and a maximum of 8 letters or numbers of which the first two characters must be letters or underscore characters Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 115 Labels that are in the block that serves as the jump destination are ended by a colon They are always at the start of a block If a block number is also present the label is located after the block number Labels must be unique within a program Programming example N10 LABEL1 Gl X20 LABEL1 is the label jump destination N20 GO X10 210 TR 789 GO X10 Z20 TR789 is the label jump destination GO X30 230 No block number existing N100 GO X40 240 Block number can be jump target M30 8 16 Subroutine technique 8 16 1 General information Usage Basically there is no difference between a main program and a subr
91. CLE94 20 60 E Cycle call N40 G90 GO z100 X50 Approach next position N50 M02 End of program 9 5 5 Cutting with relief cut CYCLE95 Programming CYCLE95 NPP MID FALZ FALX FAL FF1 FF2 FF3 VARI DT DAM _VRT Parameters REAL Feedrate for insertion into relief cut elements REAL Feedrate for finishing VARI REAL Machining type REAL Lift off distance from contour when roughing incremental to be entered without sign Function Using the rough turning cycle you can produce a contour which has been programmed in a subroutine from a blank by paraxial stock removal The contour may contain relief cut elements It is possible to machine contours using longitudinal and face machining both externally and internally The technology can be freely selected roughing finishing complete machining When roughing the contour paraxial cuts from the maximum programmed infeed depth are programmed and burrs are also removed parallel to the contour after an intersection point with the contour has been reached Roughing is performed up to the final machining allowance programmed Programming and Operating Manual Turning 164 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Finishing is performed in the same direction as roughing The tool radius compensation is selected and deselected by the cycle automatically See the following illustration for CYCLE95 e Position reached prior to cycle start Sequence The starting position is any
92. CNC turning version unless otherwise programmed or the machine manufacturer has preserved the default setting for the turning technology Address Significance Value Information Programming Tool offset number 9 only Contains compensation data for ieee no sign a particular tool T DO indicates no compensation for the tool one tool activates 1 9 numbers that is one tool carries at most 9 different Compensation data at the same time F Feedrate 0 001 99 Path velocity of a tool workpiece 999 999 unit mm min or mm revolution depending on G94 or G95 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 233 Address Significance Value Information Programming assignments F Dwell time block with 0 001 99 Dwell time in seconds G4 F separate block G4 999 999 F Thread lead change 0 001 99 in mm rev2 See G34 G35 block containing G34 999 999 G35 G G G function Only integer The G functions are divided into x preparatory function specified values G groups Only one G function of or symbolic name e g a group can be programmed in a CIP block A G function can be either modal until it is canceled by another function of the same group or only effective for the block in which it is programmed non modal Linear interpolation at rapid traverse rate 1 Motion commands type of Linear interpolation at feedrate interpolation modally effective
93. Comment Geometry Length compensation STC DPS ly lie Length offset vector Calculation acc to type and plane STC DP4 1 1 9 STC DPS I I Program code Comment Geometry Radius PTO DPell Lies Tool radius TC DP7 1 1 0 Slot width b for slotting saw rounding radius for milling tools STC DP8 1 1 0 Projection k For slotting saw only STC DP9 1 1 0 STC PLO 1 1 1 0 PTO DPT ly lio Angle for taper milling tools Program code Comment Wear Length and radius compensation oT DPIZ 1 1 0 Remaining parameters to TC_DP24 0 Tool base dimension adapter Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 67 Example Making a hook shaped groove Activate cylinder surface transformation Required tool T1 milling tool radius 3 mm edge position s8 Program code Comment N10 T1 D1 G54 G90 G94 Tool selection clamping compensation F1000 N20 SPOS 0 Approach the starting position N30 SETMS 2 Set the second spindle as the main spindle N40 M3 S2000 Run the spindle N50 DIAMOF Change the diameter dimensioning to radius dimensioning N60 G0 X23 2105 N70 TRACYL 20 Activate cylinder surface transformation N80 G19 Plane selection Machining a hook shaped groove Program code Comment N90 Gl YO Z 10 Approach starting position N100 G42 OFFN 4 5 Tool radius compensation right of contour on N110 X19 F500 N120 Z 25 N130 Y30 N140 OFFN 3 5 N150 Y N160 Z
94. Controller In all a maximum of 10 function outputs of this type are possible in a part program block 8 14 Arithmetic parameters LUD and PLC variables 8 14 1 Arithmetic parameter R Functionality The arithmetic parameters are used if an NC program is not only to be valid for values assigned once or if you must calculate values The required values can be calculated or set by the control system during program execution Another possibility consists of setting the arithmetic parameter values by operator inputs If values have been assigned to the arithmetic parameters they can be assigned to other variable setting NC addresses in the program Programming RO to R299 Assign values to the arithmetic parameters R RO Indirect programming Assign a value to the arithmetic parameter R whose number can be found e g in RO X RO Assign arithmetic parameters to the NC addresses e g for the X axis Value assignments You can assign values in the following range to the R parameters 0 000 0001 9999 9999 8 decimal places arithmetic sign and decimal point The decimal point can be omitted for integer values A plus sign can always be omitted Example RO 3 5678 R1 37 3 R2 2 R3 7 R4 45678 123 Use the exponential notation to assign an extended range of numbers 1080 10 90 The value of the exponent is written after the EX characters maximum total number of characters 10 including leading signs
95. DS continuous path mode Inch dimension input 13 Inch metric dimension data modally effective 0 G71 G700 Metric dimension data input Inch dimension data input also for feedrate G710 Metric dimension data input also for feedrate F G90 Absolute dimension data input 1 Incremental dimension input dimension modally effective G94 Feed F in mm min G95 Feedrate F in mm spindle revolutions effective Programming and Operating Manual Turning 36 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 N O NO Address Significance Value Information Programming assignments G96 Constant cutting rate ON F in mm rev S in m min Constant cutting speed OFF C450 18 Behavior at comers when G451 Point of intersection working with tool radius compensation modally effective 21 Acceleration profile modally ae ee 24 Feedforward control modally ee DIAMOF ee LOO sa call ne 47 External NC languages a ee H H function 0 0000001 Value transfer to the PLC HO H9999 9999 9999 significance defined by the 8 decimal places machine manufacturer e g H7 23 456 or specified as an exponent 10 300 10 300 Interpolation 0 001 99 Belongs to the X axis meaning See G2 G3 and G33 parameters 999 999 dependent on G2 G3 gt circle G34 G35 Thread center or G33 G34 G35 G331 0 001 2000 000 G332 gt thread lead Interpolation 0 001 99 Belongs to the Z axis others as See G
96. Drilling centering CYCLE82 Drilling counterboring CYCLE83 CYCLE87 Deep hole drilling N10 CYCLE85 separate block N10 CYCLE86 separate block Drilling with stop 1 N10 CYCLE87 separate part program block N10 CYCLE88 separate block N10 CYCLE89 CYCLE88 amp Drilling with stop 2 B CYCLE96 Thread undercut separate part program block N10 CYCLE92 separate block N10 CYCLE93 separate block N10 CYCLE94 separate block N10 CYCLE95 separate block N10 CYCLE96 separate part program block CYCLE98 CYCLE99 Thread cutting Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 241 Side by side thread mounting N10 CYCLE98 separate part program block N10 CYCLE99Q separate block Address Significance Value Information Programming assignments Absolute coordinate It is also possible to specify the N10 A DC 45 3 approach position dimensions for the end point of a Approach absolute directly for rotary axis rotary axis with DC position of the A axis spindle irrespective of G90 G91 also directly applies to spindle positioning N20 SPOS DC 33 1 Position spindle Definition instruction Defining a local user variable of DEF INT VARI1 24 the type BOOL CHAR INT VARIZ2 2 variables of the REAL directly at the beginning type INT name defined of the program by user Run in
97. G42 G42 The same compensation can again be programmed without writing G40 in between The last block before the new compensation call will end at the normal positon of the compensation vector in the end point The new compensation is carried out as a compensation start behavior as described for change in compensation direction Changing the offset number D The offset number D can be changed in the compensation mode A modified tool radius is active with effect from the block in which the new D number is programmed Its complete modification is only achieved at the end of the block In other words The modification is traversed continuously over the entire block also for circular interpolation Cancellation of compensation by M2 If the offset mode is canceled with M2 program end without writing the command G40 the last block with coordinates ends in the normal offset vector setting No compensating movement is executed The program ends with this tool position Critical machining cases When programming pay special attention to cases where the contour path for inner corners is smaller than the tool radius and smaller than the diameter for two successive inner corners Such cases should be avoided Also check over multiple blocks that the contour contains no bottlenecks When carrying out a test dry run use the largest tool radius you are offered Acute contour angles If very sharp outside corners occur in the contour with active G4
98. Measuring tools Protection level 7 Protection level 7 is set automatically if no password is set and no protection level interface signal is set The protection level 7 can be set from the PLC user program by setting the bits in the user interface In the menus listed below the input and modification of data depends on the set protection level e Tool offsets e Work offsets e Setting data e RS232 settings e Program creation program correction The number of machine data and drive data which can be read or modified depends on the protection level You can set the protection level for these function areas with the display machine data USER_CLASS Setting password You can set the desired password through the following operating area SYSTEM car AN gt password SHIFT ALARM E Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 13 1 5 Setting user interface language Operating sequence DA 1 Select the desired operating area SHIFT ALARM ERNIE 2 Press this softkey to open the user interface language selection window language 3 Use the cursor keys to select the desired language Selection of user interface language aes ars English English Portuguese Portugu s Russian Pucckmn J 4 Press this softkey to confirm your selection Ok Note The HMI Human Machine Interface is automatically restarted when a new language is selected 2 Turning on reference point approach Note
99. N10 M3 S40 Switch on spindle N20 GO G54 G90 G64 210 X60 Approach starting point N30 G33 Z 100 K5 SF 15 Thread constant lead 5mm rev Activation point at 15 degrees N40 G35 Z 150 K5 FO 16 Starting pitch 5 mm rev Pitch decrease 0 16 mm rev Thread length 50 mm Desired lead at end of block 3 mm rev N50 GO X80 Retraction in X N60 Z120 N100 M2 8 5 4 Thread interpolation G331 G332 Functionality A position controlled spindle with position measuring system is required With G331 G332 threads without compensating chuck can be drilled if the dynamic response of the spindle and the axis allow this If a compensating chuck is used nevertheless the position differences to be compensated for by the compensating chuck are reduced This allows thread grinding at higher spindle speeds G331 applies for grinding G332 for grinding in opposite direction The grinding depth is specified through the axis e g Z the thread lead through the corresponding interpolation parameter here K For G332 the same lead is programmed as for G331 The spindle direction of rotation is automatically reversed The spindle speed is programmed with S without M3 M4 Before thread grinding with G331 G332 the spindle must be brought into the closed loop position controlled mode using SPOS Right hand or left hand thread The sign of the thread lead determines the direction of spindle rotation positive right hand as with M3 N
100. N30 Z 40 N40 G60 X30 2 50 Switching over to exact stop N50 X45 2 70 N60 M30 Look ahead velocity control In the continuous path control mode with G64 the control system determines the velocity control for several NC blocks in advance automatically This enables acceleration and deceleration across multiple blocks with approximately tangential transitions For paths that consist of short travels in the NC blocks higher velocities can be achieved than without look ahead G64 Continuous path control mode with LookAhead Programmed feedrate F G60 Exact sto Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 85 8 7 2 Acceleration pattern BRISK SOFT BRISK The axes of the machine change their velocities using the maximum permissible acceleration value until reaching the final velocity BRISK allows time optimized working The set velocity is reached in a short time However jumps are present in the acceleration pattern SOFT The axes of the machine accelerate with nonlinear constant curves until reaching the final velocity With this jerk free acceleration SOFT allows for reduced machine load The same behavior can also be applied to braking procedures See the following illustration for principle course of the path velocity when using BRISK or SOFT Velocity path BRISK SOFT time optimized spares the mechanical parts Setpoint Programming BRISK Jerking path acceleration
101. Now you can see the programmed contour in the graphics window a 80 EEA Zoon i 230 13 47 14 2612 12 15 Straight line vertical 46 686 abs O Trans to next element CHR O 3 666 Free text input Contour allowance 8 888 Right O Lancel v Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 A 13 Word structure and address Functionality structure A word is a block element and mainly constitutes a control command The word consists of the following two parts e address character generally a letter e numerical value a sequence of digits which with certain addresses can be added by a sign put in front of the address and a decimal point A positive sign can be omitted The following picture shows an example of the word structure Word melee Value Address Value Address i Value Example Traverse with Path or end Explanation Linear position for the interpolation X axis 20 1mm Feedrate 300 mm min Several address characters A word can also contain several address letters In this case however the numerical value must be assigned via the intermediate character Example CR 5 23 Additionally it is also possible to call G functions using a symbolic name For more information refer to Section List of instructions Page 233 Example SCALE Enable scaling factor Extended address With the following addresses the address is extended by 1 to 4
102. P Used instead of M2 to maintain RET separate block the continuous path mode Unit of measurement of the Oa spindle r p m Unit of measurement of the S1 725 speed 725 spindle r p m r p m for spindle 1 0 001 9 999 999 Spindle speed 9 0 001 99 9 i L II Spindle speed for spindle 1 999 999 Cutting rate with G96 active Dwell time in block with G4 Tool number 0 001 9 Cutting rate unit m min with G96 G96 999 999 for spindle only S 0 001 99 Dwell time in spindle revolutions G4 S separate block 999 999 1 32 000 The tool change can be T only integer no performed either directly using sign the T command or only with M6 This can be set in the machine data U Q Q Q 3 3 mD Q J a O O 49 gt Q DS lt Q J Cc v Cc 5 2 mD wa 239 D TI Q Ol Q O oO J U O U gt er N u Address Significance Value Information Programming assignments X Axis 0 001 99 Positional data X 999 999 Axis 0 001 Positional data 999 999 The dimension can be specified for the end or center point of a certain axis irrespective of G91 i Absolute coordinate ACC ax s Percentage acceleration override Absolute coordinate approach position in the positive direction for rotary axis spindle Absolute coordinate approach position in the negative dire
103. PCIN 4c 5 5 1 2 Executing from external through RS232 interface Prerequisites e The tool SinuComPCIN has been installed on your PC PG e The RS232 communication has been successfully established between the control system and the PC PG Proceed as follows to execute a part program from external through the RS232 interface 1 Select the desired operating area on the PPU PROGRAM MANAGER 2 Press this softkey to go to the RS232 directory RS232 pores 3 Press this vertical softkey and the system automatically changes to AUTO mode in the machining cution operating area Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 41 sel Ee 4 Press this button on the main screen of SinuComPCIN and select the desired program for ace execution for example Test mpf The program is transferred to the buffer memory on the control system and then displayed in the following window Block display Current program TEST HPF TiDi 1 HE T H3S266 1 Fieee T GeeGS4Ge6 x6 2168 f HZ G6iz5 f Prog 5 If desired you can use this softkey to specify how you want the program to be executed for more BE pes information of the program control refer to Section Program control Page 37 6 Press this key to execute the program The program is reloaded continuously FA Either at the end of the program or after pressing the following key the program is automatically removed from the control system
104. Programming CYCLE96 DIATH SPL FORM VARI Parameters Data type DIATH REAL Nominal diameter of the thread REAL Starting point of the correction in the longitudinal axis FORM CHAR Definition of the form Values A for form A B for form B C for form C D for form D VARI INT Specification of undercut position Values 0 According to tool point direction 1 4 Define position Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 177 Function You can use this cycle to perform thread undercuts to DIN76 for parts with a metrical ISO thread See the following illustration for CYCLEQ6 Sequence Position reached prior to cycle start The starting position can be any position from which each thread undercut can be approached without collision The cycle creates the following sequence of motions e Approach of the starting point determined in the cycle by using GO e Selection of the tool radius compensation according to the active tool point direction Traversing along the undercut contour using the feedrate programmed before the cycle was called e Retraction to the starting point with GO and deselection of the tool radius compensation with G40 Explanation of the parameters DIATH nominal diameter Use this cycle to perform thread undercuts for metric threads from M3 through M68 If the value programmed in DIATH results in a final diameter of lt 3 mm the cycle is aborted and alarm 61601 Finished p
105. RIK 808D ADVANCED Function Manual Status LEDs LED POK Lights up green The power supply for the CNC is switched on LED RDY Lights up green The CNC is ready and the PLC is in running mode Lights up orange e On The PLC is in stop mode e Flashing The PLC is in power up mode Lights up red The CNC is in stop mode LED TEMP Unlit The CNC temperature is within the specified range Lights up orange The CNC temperature is out of range USB interface Connects to a USB device for example e An external USB memory sticker to transfer data between the USB sticker and the CNC e An external USB keyboard which functions as an external NC keyboard 1 2 Machine control panels 1 2 1 Overview Elements on the MCP Machine Control Panel front The MCP for the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED PPU is available in the following variants e Horizontal MCP variant e Vertical MCP variant with a reserved slot for the handwheel e Vertical MCP variant with an override switch for the spindle Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 9 Horizontal MCP 14 Bee ee gan goo ae apa ggg AB BBA Vertical MCP with spindle override switch gt x 10 0 ZE wo zi n EE n gt a 1 100 ENG 1 2 2 Control elements on the MCP Elements on the MCP Machine Control Panel front The following illustration uses a horizontal MCP as an example to show control elements av
106. SIEMENS SINUMERIK SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Programming and Operating Manual Turning User Manual Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety as well as to prevent damage to property The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger AXDANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken A WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken AXCAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken If more than one degree of danger is present the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage Qualified Personnel The product system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and
107. SOFT Jerk limited path acceleration Programming example N10 M3 S200 N20 SOFT G1 X30 Z784 F6 5 Jerk limited path acceleration N30 X46 Z92 N40 BRISK X87 2104 continuing with jerking path acceleration N50 X95 2110 N60 M30 8 7 3 Dwell Time G4 Functionality Between two NC blocks you can interrupt the machining process for a defined period by inserting your own block with G4 e g for relief cutting Words with F or S are only used for times in this block Any previously programmed feedrate F or a spindle speed S remain valid Programming G4 F Dwell time in seconds G4 S Dwell time in spindle revolutions Programming example N5 G1 F3 8 2 50 S300 M3 Feed F spindle speed S N10 G4 F2 5 Dwell time 2 5 seconds N20 270 N30 G4 S30 dwelling 30 revolutions of the spindle corresponds at S 300 rpm and 100 speed override to t 0 1 min N40 X20 Feed and spindle speed remain effective N50 M30 Remark G4 S is only possible if a controlled spindle is available if the speed specifications are also programmed via S Programming and Operating Manual Turning 86 6FC5398 5DP 10 0BA1 08 2013 8 8 The third axis Prerequisite The control system itself must be designed for three axes Functionality Depending on the machine design the third axis can be required These axes can be implemented as linear or rotary axes The identifier for these axes is defined by the machine manufacturer e g C
108. Slope angle of the straight line A1 e Distance of the new point with reference to PP e Slope angle of the connecting straight line A2 with reference to A1 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 213 Y 5 Accept Press this softkey to calculate the abscissa and ordinate values of the point The abscissa is the first axis and the ordinate is the second axis of the plane The abscissa value is displayed in the input field from which the calculator function has been called and the value of the ordinate is displayed in the next input field If the function is called from the part program editor the coordinates are saved with the axis names of the selected basic plane Calculating the Cartesian coordinates Hore 2 3 4 Vi 5 Accept Activate the calculator when you are in any input screen Open the lower level menu for contour elements selection Select the desired calculation function This function converts the given polar coordinates into Cartesian coordinates p Press this softkey to switch between the diameter programming and radius if programming Enter the reference point the vector length and the slope angle in the respective input fields Press this softkey to calculate the Cartesian coordinates The abscissa value is displayed in the input field from which the calculator function has been called and the value of the ordinate is displayed in the next
109. T Cancel J 4 Confirm your settings with this softkey The cycle is then automatically transferred to the program OK editor as a separate block Programming and Operating Manual Turning 160 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 9 5 4 Undercut forms E and F to DIN CYCLE94 Programming CYCLE94 SPD SPL FORM VARI Parameters Data type SPD REAL Starting point in the transversal axis enter without sign REAL Starting point of the tool compensation in the longitudinal axis enter without sign a CHAR Definition of the form Values E for form E F for form F VARI Specification of undercut position Values 0 according to tool cutting edge position 1 4 define position Function This cycle can be used to perform undercuts to DIN509 of forms E and F with standard requirements at a finished diameter of gt 3 mm See the following illustration for undercut Form F and Form E Form F Form E Sequence Position reached prior to cycle start The starting position can be any position from which the undercut can be approached without collision The cycle creates the following sequence of motions e Approach of the starting point determined in the cycle by using GO e Selection of the cutter radius compensation according to the active tool point direction and traveling along the undercut contour at the feedrate programmed prior to the cycle call Retraction to the starting point with GO and deselection of the cutter r
110. The rapid traverse movement GO is used for fast positioning of the tool however not for direct workpiece machining All axes can be traversed simultaneously on a straight path For each axis the maximum speed rapid traverse is defined in machine data If only one axis traverses it uses its rapid traverse If two axes are traversed simultaneously the path velocity resulting velocity is selected to achieve the maximum possible path velocity in consideration of both axes Any programmed feedrates F word are not relevant for GO GO remains active until canceled by another instruction from this G group GO G1 G2 G3 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 T1 See the following illustration for linear interpolation with rapid traverse from point P1to P2 Programming example N10 GO X100 Z65 Note Another option for linear programming is available with the angle specification ANG For more information see Section Contour definition programming Page 98 Information Another group of G functions exists for moving into the position see Section Exact stop continuous path control mode G9 G60 G64 Page 84 For G60 exact stop a window with various precision values can be selected with another G group For exact stop an alternative instruction with non modal effectiveness exists G9 You should consider these options for adaptation to your positioning tasks 8 3 2 Feedrate
111. Turning 38 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 NO Address Significance Value Information Programming assignments Number of subroutine 1 9999 Is used if the subroutine is run L781 P separate block passes only integer no several times and is contained in sign the same block as the call N10 L871 P3 three cycles RO Arithmetic parameters 0 0000001 R1 7 9431 R2 4 to 9999 9999 R299 8 decimal places or specified as an with specification of an exponent exponent 10 300 R1 1 9876EX9 R1 1 10 300 987 600 000 Arithmetic functions In addition to the 4 basic arithmetic functions using the operands there are the following arithmetic functions SIN Sine R1 SIN 17 35 ia Degrees Degrees R40 ATAN2 30 5 80 1 R40 20 8455 degrees O COS Cosine Degrees of RR COSIRS Tangent Degrees I OREA ASIN Arc sine S l R10 ASIN 0 35 R10 20 487 degrees ACOS Arc cosine ey R20 ACOS R2 R20 ATAN2 Arctangent2 The angle of the sum vector is calculated from 2 vectors standing vertically one on another The 2nd vector specified is always used for angle reference Result in the range 180 to 180 degrees SQRT Square root POT ABS TRUNC Truncate to integer LN Natural logarithm EXP Exponential function RET Subroutine end R6 SQRT R7 Square PR 1 POTIRIB O Absolute value po BABS po pd 9 ed R1 R R10 TRUNC R2 R12 LN R EXP i R13 EX
112. VARI machining type If parameter VARI 0 is set the drill retracts 1 mm after reaching each drilling depth for chip breaking If VARI 1 for chip removal the drill traverses in each case to the reference plane shifted by the amount of the safety clearance Note The anticipation distance is calculated internally in the cycle as follows e lf the drilling depth is 30 mm the value of the anticipation distance is always 0 6 mm e For larger drilling depths the formula drilling depth 50 is used maximum value 7 mm AXN tool axis By programming the drilling axis via AXN it is possible to omit the switchover from plane G18 to G17 when the deep hole drilling cycle is used on turning machines The identifiers have the following meanings First axis of the current plane Second axis of the current plane Third axis of the current plane For example to machine a center hole in Z in the G18 plane you program G18 AXN 1 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 133 MDEP minimum drilling depth You can define a minimum drilling depth for drill stroke calculations based on a degression factor If the calculated drilling stroke becomes shorter than the minimum drilling depth the remaining depth is machined in strokes equaling the length of the minimum drilling depth VRT variable retraction value for chip breakage with VARI 0 You can program the retraction path for chip breaking DTD dwell ti
113. aa 6 688 6 668 6 668 G54 6 868 4 888 8 808 GSS 4 868 4 888 6 668 GSG 4 688 4 888 6 688 GS 4 668 4 888 6 688 G58 4 668 4 888 6 688 GS 4 868 4 888 6 668 Program 4 888 4 688 4 688 Scale 1 686 1 666 1 666 Hirror A A H Total 6 668 6 668 6 688 E 4 Confirm your entries The changes to the work offsets are activated immediately A 3 Entering modifying the setting data Entering modifying the setting data Operating sequence to 1 Select the desired operating area Cott Open the setting data window SD data rn 3 Position the cursor bar in the input fields to be modified and enter the values see table below for the parameter descriptions a 4 Use this key or move the cursor to confirm your entries Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 201 Parameters in the setting data window JOG data 1 JOG feedrate 6 688 nn min 2 Spindle speed H 668 rph Spindle data 3 Hininunm A ga rpr 4 Haximun 1080 86 rph Limitation with G96 166 666 rpm DRY 6 Dry run feedrate c ApA gAA mm min Start angle T Start angle for thread H 666 The feedrate in JOG mode If the feedrate value Programmable upper speed limitation at constant cutting is zero then the control system will use the value rate G96 stored in the machine data The speed of the spindle The feedrate which can be entered here will be used instead of the programmed feedrate in AUTO mode if the c
114. active Internal and external corners are detected automatically by the control system For internal corners the intersection of the equidistant paths is always approached Programming G450 Transition circle G451 Point of intersection See the following illustration for corner behavior at an external corner External corner Transition circle External corner G450 radius tool radius G451 Point of intersection Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 105 See the following illustration for corner behavior at an internal corner Internal corner Point of intersection Transition circle G450 The tool center point travels around the workpiece external corner in an arc with the tool radius In view of the data for example as far as the feedrate value is concerned the transition circle belongs to the next block containing traversing movements Point of intersection G451 For a 6451 intersection of the equidistant paths the point intersection that results from the center point paths of the tool circle or straight line is approached 8 11 6 Tool radius compensation OFF G40 Functionality The compensation mode G41 G42 is deselected with G40 G40 is also the switch on position at the beginning of the program The tool ends the block before G40 in the normal end position compensation vector vertical to the tangent in the end point independently of the start angle If G40 is
115. active the reference point is the tool tip The tool tip then travels to the programmed point upon deselection Always select the end point of the G40 block such that collision free traversing is guaranteed Programming G40 X Z Tool radius compensation OFF Remark The compensation mode can only be deselected with linear interpolation GO G1 Program both axes If you only specify one axis the second axis is automatically completed with the last programmed value See the following illustration for ending the tool radius compensation with G40 Final contour Straight Final contour Circle P2 Tangent p P1 R cutting edge radius P2 end point block with G40 Programming example N10 T4 D1 M3 S1000 FO 1 N20 GO X50 Z50 N30 Gl G42 X30 240 N40 G2 X20 220 R15 N50 Gl X10 210 N60 G40 Gl XO ZO Last block on the contour circle or straight line Pl N70 M30 Switch off tool radius compensation P2 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 106 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 8 11 7 Special cases of the tool radius compensation Change of the compensation direction The G41 2 G42 compensation direction can be changed without writing G40 in between The last block that uses the old compensation direction will end at the normal end position of the compensation vector in the end point The new compensation direction is executed as a compensation start default setting at starting point Repetition of G41 G41 or
116. adius compensation with G40 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 161 Explanation of the parameters SPD and SPL starting point Use the parameter SPD to specify the finished part diameter for the undercut The SPL parameter defines the finished dimension in the longitudinal axis If a final diameter of lt 3 mm results for the value programmed for SPD the cycle is canceled and alarm 61601 Finished part diameter too small is issued X SPL FORM definition Form E and form F are fixed in DIN509 and must be defined using this parameter If the parameter has a value other than E or F the cycle aborts and creates alarm 61609 Form defined incorrectly See the following illustration for Form E and Form F For workpieces with a machined surface FORM F For workpieces with two machining planes standing one on another in a right angle VARI undercut position The position of the undercut can be either specified directly or derived from the tool point direction with the _VARI parameter VARI 0 According to tool point direction The tool point direction is determined by the cycle automatically from the active tool compensation The cycle can operate with the tool point directions 1 4 If the cycle detects any of the tool point directions 5 9 the alarm 61608 Wrong tool point direction programmed and the cycle is aborted Programming and Operating Manual Turning 162 6FC5
117. ailable on the MCP 19 i LLP MP he LEAP PT ac ae i sro Reserved hole for emergency stop button rog Axis traversing keys Handwheel key 8 Spindle override switch Controls the axis movement with external handwheels unavailable for the vertical MCP with reserved handwheel slot Tool number display Spindle state keys Displays the current tool number Operating mode keys Feedrate override switch Traverses the selected axis at the specified feedrate override Program control keys Keys for program start stop and reset User defined keys O US For more information refer to the table below Programming and Operating Manual Turning 10 6FC5398 5DP 10 0BA1 08 2013 Further information User defined keys Pressing this in any operating mode switches on off the lamp LED lit The lamp is switched on LED unlit The lamp is switched off Pressing this key in any operating mode switches on off the coolant supply LED lit The coolant supply is switched on LED unlit The coolant supply is switched off Pressing this key starts sequential tool changes active only in JOG mode LED lit The machine starts sequential tool changes LED unlit The machine stops sequential tool changes Pressing this key in any operating mode activates the chuck to clamp unclamp the workpiece LED lit Activates the chuck to clamp the workpiece LED unlit Activates the chuck to unclamp the workpiece Pressing this key o
118. al Programming EXTCALL lt path program name gt Parameter EXTCALL Keyword for subroutine call lt Path program name gt Constant variable of STRING type Example EXTCALL D EXTERNE_UP RECHTECKTASCHE Note External subroutines must not contain jump statements such as GOTOF GOTOB CASE FOR LOOP WHILE Or REPEAT IF ELSE ENDIF constructions are possible Subroutine calls and nested EXTCALL calls may be used RESET POWER ON RESET and POWER ON cause external subroutine calls to be interrupted and the associated load memory to be erased Example Processing of external customer USB memory stick Programming and Operating Manual Turning 118 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 The Main mpf main program is stored in NC memory and is selected for execution NO10 PROC MAIN NO20 GO X0 ZO NO30 EXTCALL N EXTERNE UP BOHRUNG NO40 GO X100 2100 NO50 M30 The BOHRUNG SPE subprogram to be reloaded is located on the USB memory sticker NO10 PROC BOHRUNG NO20 Gl F1000 G94 NO30 X 10 Z 10 NO40 GO X50 250 N999999 M17 8 17 Timers and workpiece counters 8 17 1 Runtime timer Functionality The timers are prepared as system variables A that can be used for monitoring the technological processes in the program or only in the display These timers are read only There are timers that are always active Others can be deactivated via machine data Timers always active e AN_SETUP_TIME Time since the
119. al drilling depth e Retraction to the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance with G1 and the retraction feedrate defined under the parameter RFF e Retraction to the retraction plane with GO Explanation of the parameters For an explanation of the parameters RTP RFP SDIS DP and DPR refer to Section Drilling centering CYCLE81 Page 127 See the following parameters for CYCLE85 DP RFP DPR DTB dwell time The dwell time to the final drilling depth is programmed under DTB in seconds FFR feedrate The feedrate value programmed under FFR is active in drilling Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 143 RFF retraction feedrate The feedrate value programmed under RFF is active when retracting from the hole to the reference plane safety clearance Programming example First boring pass CYCLE85 is called at Z70 XO The drilling axis is the Z axis The value for the final drilling depth in the cycle call is programmed as a relative value no dwell time is programmed The workpiece upper edge is at ZO N10 G90 GO S300 M3 N20 T3 G17 G54 270 XO Approach drilling position N30 CYCLE85 10 2 2 25 300 450 Cycle call no dwell time programmed N40 M2 End of program 9 4 9 Boring CYCLE86 Programming CYCLE86 RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR DTB SDIR RPA 0 RPAP POSS Parameters Be Ra pam O RFP REAL DP REAL Final ting dophabsote OOOO per REAL e
120. allation personnel commissioning engineers and service and maintenance personnel Function Manual Mechanical and electrical designers technical professionals Parameter Manual Mechanical and electrical designers technical professionals PLC Subroutines Manual Mechanical and electrical designers technical professionals and commissioning engineers My Documentation Manager MDM Under the following link you will find information to individually compile your documentation based on the Siemens content siemens com mdm Standard scope This manual only describes the functionality of the standard version Extensions or changes made by the machine tool manufacturer are documented by the machine tool manufacturer Technical support Hotline Service and Support Global support hotline e Chinese Web site 49 0 911 895 7222 ttp www siemens com cn 808D e Support hotline in China e Global Web site 86 4008104288 china ttp support automation siemens com EC Declaration of Conformity Ne Declaration of Conformitv for the EMC Directive can be found on the Internet at http support automation siemens com Here enter the number 15257461 as the search term or contact your local Siemens office Programming and Operating Manual Turning 2 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Table of contents FA Saas aoe ee a E ote A A OE E vcr nnn ovens eaters advan deen ee ered e eet 1 INU OCC OM otoconia tices ccna ceases cam ean ate
121. ameter it is defined whether external or internal machining will be carried out and which technology will be used with regard to the infeed when roughing The VARI parameter can assume values between 1 and 4 with the following meaning Infeed with constant infeed depth Infeed with constant cutting cross section Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 183 If a different value is programmed for the VARI parameter the cycle is aborted after output of alarm 61002 Machining type defined incorrectly NUMTH number of thread turns Use the NUMTH parameter to define the number of thread turns with a multiple turn thread For a single turn thread the parameter must be assigned zero or can be dropped completely in the parameter list The thread turns are distributed equally over the circumference of the turned part the first thread turn is determined by the NSP parameter To produce a multiple turn thread with an asymmetrical arrangement of the thread turns on the circumference the cycle for each thread turn must be called when programming the appropriate starting point offset 0 degree marker I I Start Start 1 thread 4t thread Start Stell 3 thread 2 thread NUMTH 4 _VRT variable retraction path The retraction path can be programmed on the basis of the initial thread diameter in the _VRT parameter For VRT 0 parameter not programmed the retraction path is 1 mm The retra
122. ample of infeed depth Ww N x Machining section 1 has a total depth of 39 mm If the maximum infeed depth is 5 mm eight roughing cuts are required These are carried out with an infeed of 4 875 mm Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 167 In machining step 2 8 roughing steps too are carried out with an infeed of 4 5 mm each total difference 36 mm In machining step 3 two roughing passes are carried out with a current infeed of 3 5 total difference 7 mm FAL FALZ and FALX finishing allowance A finishing allowance for roughing can be specified either using the parameters FALZ and FALX if you want to specify different finishing allowances axis specifically or via the parameter FAL for a finishing allowance that follows the contour In this case this value is taken into account in both axes as a finishing allowance No plausibility check is carried out for the programmed values In other words If all three parameters are assigned values all these finishing allowances are taken into account by the cycle It is however reasonable to decide either on the one or other form of definition of a finishing allowance Roughing is always carried out up to these finishing allowances The resulting residual corner is also removed parallel to the contour after each paraxial roughing process immediately so that no additional residual corner cut is required after completion of roughing If no
123. an be treated like individual variables The field index runs from 0 to a small number of the elements Example N10 PVAR7 2 24 The third field element with index 2 is assigned the value 24 Value assignment for field with SET instruction 20 PVAR5S 2 SET 1 2 3 After the 3rd field element different values are assigned Value assignment for field with REP instruction N20 PVAR7 4 REP 2 After field element 4 all are assigned the same value here 2 8 14 3 Reading and writing PLC variables Functionality To allow rapid data exchange between NC and PLC a special data area exists in the PLC user interface with a length of 512 bytes In this area PLC data are compatible in data type and position offset In the NC program these compatible PLC variables can be read or written To this end special system variables are provided A_DBB n Data byte 8 bit value A_DBW In Data word 16 bit value A_DBDJn Data double word 32 bit value A_DBR n REAL data 32 bit value n stands here for the position offset start of data area to start of variable in bytes Programming example R1 SA_DBR 4 Reading a REAL value offset 4 starts at byte 4 of range Note The reading of variables generates a preprocessing stop internal STOPRE Programming and Operating Manual Turning 112 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Note Writing of PLC tags is generally limited to a maximum of three tags elements W
124. an type values TRUE 1 FALSE 0 DEF CHAR varname2 Char type 1 ASCII code character a b Numerical code value 0 255 DEF INT varname3 Integer type integer values 32 bit value range 2 147 483 648 through 2 147 483 647 decimal DEF REAL varname4 Real type natural number like arithmetic parameter R Value range 0 000 0001 9999 9999 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 111 8 decimal places arithmetic sign and decimal point or Exponential notation 10 to power of 300 10 to power of 300 DEF STRING string length varname41 STRING type string length Maximum number of characters Each data type requires its own program line However several variables of the same type can be defined in one line Example DEF INT PVAR1 PVAR2 PVAR3 12 PVAR4 4 type INT variables Example for STRING type with assignment DEF STRING 12 PVAR Hello Define variable PVAR with a maximum of 12 characters and assign string Hello Fields In addition to the individual variables one or two dimensional fields of variables of these data types can also be defined DEF INT PVAR5 n One dimensional field type INT n integer DEF INT PVAR6 n m Two dimensional field type INT n m integer Example DEF INT PVAR 3 Field with 3 elements of the type INT Within the program the individual field elements can be reached via the field index and c
125. anation of the parameters For an explanation of the parameters RTP RFP SDIS DP and DPR refer to Section Drilling centering CYCLE81 Page 127 See the following parameters for CYCLE82 E RFP SDIS 4 lt gt G4 G1 GO DP RFP DPR DTB dwell time The dwell time to the final drilling depth chip breakage is programmed under DTB in seconds Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 129 Programming example 1 Boring_counterboring The program machines a single hole of a depth of 20 mm at position XO with cycle CYCLE82 The dwell time programmed is 3 s the safety clearance in the drilling axis Z is 2 4 mm N10 GO G90 G54 F2 S300 M3 Specification of technology values N20 D1 T6 Z50 Approach retraction plane N30 G17 XO Approach drilling position N40 CYCLES2 3 1 1 2 4 20 7 3 Cycle call with absolute final drilling depth and safety clearance N50 M2 End of program Programming example 2 Proceed through the following steps E 1 Select the desired operating area Open the vertical softkey bar for available drilling cycles J Drill renter 3 Press this softkey from the vertical softkey bar drilling rere 4 Press this softkey to open the window for CYCLE82 Parameterize the cycle as desired drilling Dest 201270872 N MPF5 1 MPF 1 Retract plane absolute 6 66660 2 66060 26 66660 6 66060 6 56660 Cancel J 5 Confirm your settings with
126. and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 31 4 3 Managing part programs Searching for programs PROGRAM MANAGER NC NC u cycle ai USB 4q Netwo drive DEH EF files User files Search Select the desired operating area Select the storage medium in which you wish to perform the search Note The following two folders are visible with the manufacturer password U anella Ls ee Press this vertical softkey to open the search window Enter the complete name with extension of the program file to be searched in the first input field in the search window To narrow your search you can enter the desired text in the second field Use this key to choose whether to include subordinate folders or observe upper lower case Press this softkey to start the search or otherwise press the following softkey to cancel the search x Cancel Copying and pasting programs PROGRAM MANAGER Copy Paste 32 1 Select the desired operating area Open the desired directory Select the program file that you would like to copy Press this softkey to copy the selected file Select the target directory with the horizontal softkeys Press this softkey to paste the file from the clipboard to the current directory Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Deleting restoring programs in 1 MANAGER 2 A 4 DEL Fi 5 OK Renaming
127. and Operating Manual Turning 98 6FC5398 5DP 10 0BA1 08 2013 See the following illustration for angle value for determination of a straight line X5 Z3 f N30 X1 Z1 N20 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 ANG 2 End point in N20 not fully known N10 G1 X1 Z1 N20 X2 ANG or N10 G1 X1 Z1 N20 Z2 ANG The values are only symbolic End point in N20 unknown N10 G1 X1 Z1 N20 ANG 30 N30 X5 Z3 ANG 60 N40 M30 End point in N20 unknown insert rounding N10 G1 X1 Z1 N20 ANG 30 RND 0 1 N30 X5 Z3 ANG 60 analog Inserting a chamfer N10 G1 X1 Z1 N20 ANG 30 CHR 0 1 N30 X5 Z3 ANG 60 End point in N20 known Inserting a rounding N10 G1 X1 Z1 N20 X2 Z2 RND 0 5 N30 X5 Z3 analog Inserting a chamfer N10 G1 X1 Z1 N20 X2 Z2 CHR 0 2 N30 X5 Z3 End point in N20 unknown Inserting a rounding N10 G1 X1 Z1 N20 ANG 30 RND 0 3 N30 X5 Z3 ANG 60 RND 0 3 N40 X3 Z4 analog Inserting a chamfer N10 G1 X1 Z1 N20 ANG 30 CHR 0 3 N30 X5 Z3 ANG 60 CHR 0 3 N40 X3 Z4 N50 M30 99 8 11 Tool and tool offset 8 11 1 General information turning Functionality During program creation for the workpiece machining you do not have to take tool lengths or cutting radius into consideration You program the workpiece dimensions directly e g according to the drawing The tool data must be entered separately in a special data area In the program you will merely call the required
128. and decimal point Range of values for EX 300 to 300 Example RO 0 1EX 5 Meaning RO 0 000 001 R1 1 874EX8 Meaning R1 187 400 000 Note There can be several assignments in one block incl assignments of arithmetic expressions Assignments to other addresses The flexibility of an NC program lies in assigning these arithmetic parameters or expressions with arithmetic parameters to other NC addresses Values arithmetic expressions and arithmetic parameters can be assigned to all addresses Exception addresses N G and L When assigning write the sign after the address character It is also possible to have an assignment with a minus sign A separate block is required for assignments to axis addresses traversing instructions Example N10 GO X R2 Assignment to X axis Programming and Operating Manual Turning 110 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Arithmetic operations arithmetic functions When operators arithmetic functions are used it is imperative to use conventional mathematical notation Machining priorities are set with round brackets Otherwise multiplication and division take precedence over addition and subtraction Degrees are used for the trigonometric functions Programming example Calculating with R parameters N10 R1 R1 1 The new R1 is calculated from the old R1 plus 1 N20 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 RO R7 R8 R9 R1LO R11 R12 N30 R13 SIN 25 3 R13 equals sine of 25 3 degrees N40 R14 R1 R2 R3 Multiplic
129. art diameter too small is issued If the parameter has a value other than specified in DIN76 Part 1 the cycle is also canceled generating the alarm 61001 Thread lead defined incorrectly SPL starting point The finished dimension in the longitudinal axis is defined using the parameter SPL Programming and Operating Manual Turning 178 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 FORM definition Thread undercuts of the forms A and B are defined for external threads form A for standard run outs of threads and form B for short run outs of threads Thread undercuts of the forms C and D are used for internal threads form C for a standard run out of the thread and form D for a short run out See the following illustration for Forms A and B FORMS A and B See the following illustration for Forms C and D FORMS C and D If the parameter has a value other than A D the cycle aborts and creates alarm 61609 Form defined incorrectly Internally in the cycle the tool radius compensation is selected automatically The cycle only uses the tool point directions 1 4 If the cycle detects a tool point direction 5 9 or if the form of the undercut cannot be machined with the selected tool point direction alarm 61608 Wrong tool point direction programmed is issued and the cycle is canceled VARI undercut position The position of the undercut can be either specified directly or derived from the tool point direction with t
130. ate IN Angle A ee Radius R Dianeter programming Programming and Operating Manual Turning 212 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 5 Press this softkey to calculate the abscissa and ordinate values of the point Accept The abscissa is the first axis and the ordinate is the second axis of the plane The abscissa value is displayed in the input field from which the calculator function has been called and the value of the ordinate is displayed in the next input field If the function is called from the part program editor the coordinates are saved with the axis names of the selected basic plane Example Calculating the point of intersection between the circle sector and the straight line in plane G18 Given Radius 10 Circle center point CC Z 147 X 183 diameter programming Connection angle for straight lines 45 CC abscissa CC ordinate Angle A Radius R Dianeter programming Result Z 154 077 X 190 071 The result appears on the input screen Calculating a point in a plane 1 Activate the calculator when you are in any input screen 2 Open the lower level menu for contour elements selection Hore oe Select the desired calculation function i Press this softkey to switch between the diameter programming and radius REC programming 4 Enter the following coordinates or angles in the respective input fields e Coordinates of the given point PP e
131. ate MD30600 MA_FIX_POINT_POSj n 1 If no FP is programmed then the first fixed point is selected Fixed point approach Fixed point that is to be approached The fixed point number is specified lt n gt Value range of lt n gt 1 2 3 4 MD30610 NUM_FIX_POINT_POS should be set if fixed point number 3 or 4 is to be used If no fixed point number is specified fixed point 1 is approached automatically Machine axes to be traversed to the fixed point Specify the axes with value 0 with which the fixed point is to be approached simultaneously Each axis is traversed with the maximum axial velocity Programming example NO5 G75 FP 1 X 0 Approach fixed point 1 in X N10 G75 FP 2 Z 0 Approach fixed point 2 in Z e g for tool change N30 M30 End of program Note The programmed position values for X Z any value here 0 are ignored but must still be written 8 6 2 Reference point approach G74 Functionality The reference point can be approached in the NC program with G74 The direction and speed information of each axis is stored in the machine data G74 needs a separate block and is active based on the block mode The machine axis identifier must be programmed In the block after G74 the previous G command of the Interpolation type group GO G1 G2 is active again Programming example N10 G74 X 0 Z 0 Note The programmed position values for X Z here 0 are ignored but must still be written Pr
132. ation the traversing movements of the cycle are visualized on the screen 9 3 Graphical cycle support in the program editor The program editor in the control system provides programming support to add cycle calls to the program and to enter parameters Function The cycle support consists of three components 1 Cycle selection 2 Input screens for parameter assignment 3 Help display per cycle Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 123 Operating the cycle support To add a cycle call to the program proceed as described below 7 1 Select the desired operating area l Select a cycle type with the corresponding horizontal softkey to open the lower level vertical softkey Drill bar until the desired input screen form with the help display appears on the screen gm Turn 3 Enter the values directly numerical values or indirectly R parameters for example R27 or expressions consisting of R parameters for example R27 10 If numerical values are entered the control system will automatically perform a check to see whether the value lies within the permitted range O 4 Use this key to select values for some parameters that may have only a few values for selection Hodal 5 For drilling cycles it is also possible to call a cycle modally with this key To deselect the modal call call move the cursor to the next blank line of the program and press the softkey
133. ation and division take precedence over addition or subtraction R14 R1 R2 R3 N50 R14 R3 R2 R1 Result the same as block N40 N60 R15 SORT R1 R1 R2 R2 Meaning N70 R1 R1 The new Rl is the negative old R1 Programming example Assign R parameters to the axes N10 G1 G91 G94 X R1 Z R2 F300 Separate blocks traversing blocks N20 Z R3 N30 X R4 N40 Z SIN 25 3 R5 With arithmetic operations M30 Programming example Indirect programming N10 R1 5 Assigning R1 directly value 5 integer R2 6 R1 R2 1 N100 R R1 27 123 Indirectly assign R5 the value 27 123 M30 8 14 2 Local User Data LUD Functionality The operator programmer user can define his her own variable in the program from various data types LUD Local User Data These variables are only available in the program in which they were defined The definition takes place immediately at the start of the program and can also be associated with a value assignment at the same time Otherwise the starting value is zero The name of a variable can be defined by the programmer The naming is subject to the following rules e A maximum of 31 characters can be used e tis imperative to use letters for the first two characters the remaining characters can be either letters underscore or digits e Do not use a name already used in the control system NC addresses keywords names of programs subroutines etc Programming data types DEF BOOL varname Boole
134. ation when the cycle is called the execution of the cycle is aborted with the alarm 61000 No tool compensation active Programming example 1 Plunge cutting This program is used to produce a groove externally at an oblique line in the longitudinal direction The starting point is on the right hand side at X35 Z60 The cycle will use the tool compensations D1 and D2 of tool T5 The cutting tool must be defined accordingly Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 159 See the following illustration for the example for plunge cutting N10 GO G90 Z65 X50 T5 D1 S400 M3 Starting point before the beginning of the cycle N20 G95 F0 2 Specification of technology values N30 CYCLE93 35 60 307 257 5S 10 20 Op 0p 2 2 l 1 Cycle call 10 1 50 2 Retraction distance of 0 2 mm programmed N40 GO G90 X50 Z65 Next position N50 M02 End of program Programming example 2 E 1 Select the desired operating area 2 Open the vertical softkey bar for available turning cycles g Turn 3 Press this softkey to open the window for CYCLE93 Parameterize the cycle as desired Groove VAN z r _ amp 2072732704 N S HPF 51 MPF CYCLE93 Starting point along facing axis 30 5000A WIDG 7 00000 DIAG 5 66660 STA1L 6 66668 ANG1 6 66668 ANGZ 6 66666 RCO1 1 66668 RCO2 1 66668 RCI1i RCI2 6 66668 FAL1 6 26666 FAL2 6 16668 IDEP 2 56660 DTB 6 56660 VARI 11 Q VR
135. automatically set to zero after each power up of the control system Programming example N10 IF SAC CUTTING TIME gt R10 GOTOF WZZEIT Tool operation time limit value GO X50 250 N80 WZZEIT GO X60 Z60 N90 MSG Tool action time Limit value reached N100 MO M30 Display The content of the active system variables is visible on the window opened through the following key operations t o E Sett Time Be 5D data counter Window display Times Counter G Parts in total B Q Parts required a 3 Part count A 4 Run time H668H HAM AAS Cycle time aHHAH HAM HAS Cutting tine 6666H HAM HBS Setup time ag19H ZZM Power on time OHHAH 48M AC_TOTAL_PARTS AC_CYCLE_TIME AC_REQUIRED_PARTS AC_CUTTING_TIME AC_ACTUAL_PARTS AN_SETUP_TIME AC_SPECIAL_PARTS is not available for display AC_OPERATING_TIME AN_POWERON_TIME You can also view the time counter information through the following operating area p gt gt D M f Time l counter MACHINE AUTO r 8 17 2 Workpiece counter Functionality The Workpiece counter function provides counters for counting workpieces These counters exist as system variables with write and read access from the program or via operator input observe the protection level for writing Machine data can be used to control counter activation counter reset timing and the counting algorithm Programming and Operati
136. axis of the working plane e g X axis with G17 The positive direction of rotation runs counter clockwise If there are several input poles the definitive pole is always the last pole before the input or edited element Incremental polar coordinates relate to both the definitive pole and the end point of the preceding element For an incremental input the absolute distance to the pole is calculated using the absolute distance from the end point of the preceding element to the pole plus the length increment that was entered The increment can be positive or negative The absolute angle is calculated accordingly using the absolute polar angle of the preceding element plus the angular increment Here it is not necessary for the preceding element to have been entered as polar In contour programming the contour calculator converts the Cartesian coordinates of the preceding end point using the definitive pole into polar coordinates This also applies if the preceding element has been given in polar coordinates since this could relate to another pole if a pole has been inserted in the meantime Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 225 Pole change example Polar coordinates predecessor ref to pole 1 Li 3 6603 9 0 Ao VA o Polar coordinates referring to pole 0 input Pole Zpole 0 0 Xpole 0 0 Pole 0 End point L1abs 10 0 dabs 30 0 Calculated Cart Coordinates Zabs 8 660
137. ays the Z axis See the following example for drilling centering_drilling on turning center without tool 35 100 108 N10 GO G17 G90 F200 S300 M3 Specification of technology values N20 D1 T3 Z110 Approach retraction plane N30 XO Approach drilling position N40 CYCLE81 110 100 2 35 Cycle call with absolute end drilling depth safety clearance and incomplete parameter list M30 Program end Programming and Operating Manual Turning 128 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 9 4 4 Drilling counterboring CYCLE82 Programming CYCLE82 RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR DTB Parameters Data type REAL Retraction plane absolute REAL Reference plane absolute DP REAL Finaldrilling depth absolutey o DPR REAL Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane enter without sign Function The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate to the entered final drilling depth A dwell time can be allowed to elapse when the final drilling depth has been reached Sequence Position reached prior to cycle start The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane The cycle creates the following sequence of motions e Approach of the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance by using GO e Traversing to the final drilling depth with the feedrate G1 programmed prior to the cycle call e Dwell time at final drilling depth e Retraction to the retraction plane with GO Expl
138. block of the processing sequence End of subroutine Can be found in the last block of the processing sequence CW rotation of spindle o CCW rotation of spindle Spindle stop CW rotation of spindle CCW rotation of spindle for spindle n Spindle stop for spindle n M30 M17 M3 M1 3 CW rotation stop for spindle 1 M1 4 CCW rotation stop for spindle 1 M1 5 Spindle stop for spindle 1 n 1 n 1 n 1 M D Tool change Only if activated with M6 via the machine control panel otherwise change directly using the T command M40 Automatic gear stage switching Mn 40 Automatic gear stage switching for spindle n M1 40 automatic gear n stage for spindle 1 M41 to M45 Gear stage 1 to gear stage 5 Mn 41 to Gear stage 1 to gear stage 5 for spindle n n 1 M1 41 1st gear stage for Mn 45 spindle 1 m70 M19 Reserved do not use M Remaining M functions Functionality is not defined by the control system and can therefore be used freely by the machine manufacturer Block number 0 9999 9999 Can be used to identify blocks N20 subblock only integer no with a number is written at the M4 M5 Mn Mn Mn 4 3 4 3 sign beginning of a block Block number of a 0 9999 9999 Special block identification used main block only integer no instead of N such a block sign should contain all instructions for a complete subsequent machining step 20 Programming and Operating Manual
139. ce dams baednetieeeeedsuschandedeoeesdinebnas easaseeadance A 3 Entering modifying the Setting data ccccceccceseeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesaeeeesseeseesaaeeessaeeeeeas A 4 Setting R parameters eorccawccers secceenisrwceterculentacsnctedocenctesatdencelaxdedieade duutelercaduetecsuuseteceenbeladdeetelersudeetetseniedeles A 5 Setting user Data eee cccceecccceescecceeececceescecceuseecsueeecseueeecseueeeseueeeeseuseeeseuseessaeseeseseesseuseesseeeessueeessenseesaaes A 6 Other settings in JOG mode cece ceccccceeccceececeeeeceececeuceceeeesseeeeseueeseeessaeessueeeseeeeseacesseessaeeeseueesaneessaes A 6 1 Setting the relative coordinate system REL cccccccccseeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeeseneeesaees Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 5 oeting He JOG QIIAR ee ee eee eee ee eer eee The NEID SY SUSE arca etd ania ered b eae E EEE Sree atin E Tens E SEd NEY Sr HOM wizard esane E A e ARRENE ARE AE ER SAE AERAR Editing Chinese characters xc 6c5c 5c5 taccccesibersdcncscccnnsetcacacs Ai A AEEA EEEE E E EAEE A AA ERENER in E Enana P cketcalculatOr srecen a AE E a Ea TE Calculating contour elements cccccseeccccsseecceeeeecceuececceueeecseueeeceuscecseueeecseeeessausesseueeessageeesseesessaneeeses Free contour programming cccceccs secs eeeceeeeceeeceeeeee ees eeseeeeseeeeeeeseeeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeseeessueeseeesees
140. ce of the tens digit of the VARI parameter e With VARI lt 10 tens 0 Chamfers with CHF e With VARI gt 10 chamfers programmed with CHR FAL1 and FAL2 finishing allowance It is possible to program separate finishing allowances for groove base and flanks During roughing stock removal is carried out up to these finishing allowances The same tool is then used to machine a contour parallel cut along the final contour Final machining allowance of the flanks FAL2 Final machining allowance at the base FAL1 IDEP infeed depth You can divide the paraxial grooving into several depth infeeds by programming an infeed depth After each infeed the tool is retracted by 1 mm for chip breaking The IDEP parameter must be programmed in all cases DTB dwell time The dwell time at the groove base should be selected such that at least one spindle revolution is carried out It is programmed in seconds Programming and Operating Manual Turning 158 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 VARI machining type The machining type of the groove is defined with the units digit of the VARI parameter It can assume the values indicated in the illustration The tens digit of parameter VARI determines how the chamfers are taken into account VARI 1 8 Chamfers are calculated as CHF VARI 11 18 Chamfers are calculated as CHR eo m VARI 2 12 Z gt gt Z VARI 4 14 Z w Z VARI 6 16 Z gt gt VARI 7 17 Z VARI 8 18 Z If the
141. cesenedeacendedendcceenetscideiaialoeadee cectebedeiadedeieccd sexes desdenciedededteesedeecine 9 4 4 Drilling counterboring CYCLE82 0 0 cecccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeee ee eeeeee ee eeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeesaeeeesseeseesaaeeeesaeeeeeas 9 4 5 Deep hole drilling CY CUBGS wx ceca ctescctcarshcte acenec dans ia r a eae a ae iaaii 9 4 6 Rigid tap png CYCLE Gae aspect gees ea eet E E E E E E E EE 9 4 7 Tapping with compensating chuck CYCLE840 9 4 8 Reamingl CYCLES ucin S E mre een rT een re rete ee ne 9 4 9 Borage Org Oe LESC eeeeen ee eee crete rer enn E e ereeee eeeeeeeree eee 9 4 10 ES OOM MVS with stop 1 CYCLEB cass asses te aden bess serene mee de ae pete vos ANTEA AENEA ER sesame 9 4 11 Drilling with Stop 2 CY CLES8 ic scciccccescccccedecdsceavecddacecncdeccestcadehedesbence avis chavescesceeadedesarecdeedesivecetbeeadeeuesedes 9 4 12 FROIN 2 Sp ee asses eres Tea n Ee scenes adeeoSacastbetand N sesmecteut nee Sane ceeeuece 9 5 DREITA IN Cy CLS Soi ropes eaten N EEE AEN POEA A AE E 9 5 1 Reduie me Mo essa a E eee ee 9 5 2 cuore CrO Eo nerra oe ee eee ee eee ee E ee ee E 9 5 3 PO Oy IS oc aan pee ie seers en ccc nc srs sn EE E 9 5 4 Undercut forms E and F to DIN CYCLE94 0 00 ccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeeaeeeesseeeeesaeeeeeseeeeneas 9 5 5 Cutting with relief cut CYCLEQS ce ccccccccceseecceeeeecceececseeeeceascecseuseesseueeessacesseeeessaueeessueeessaneeessags 9 5 6 Wibread undercut C VC eG peop acter Noe dent bates
142. complete the contour maximum and this part is removed as the undercut Programming and Operating Manual Turning 170 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 See the following illustration for contour definition Added Straight line End point Starting point If a tool radius compensation is programmed in the contour subroutine with G41 G42 the cycle is canceled and alarm 10931 Faulty cutting contour is issued contour direction The direction in which the stock removal contour is programmed can be freely selected In the cycle the machining direction is defined automatically In complete machining the contour is finished in the same direction as machining was carried out when roughing When deciding on the machining direction the first and the last programmed contour points are taken into account Therefore both coordinates must always be programmed in the first block of the contour subroutine Contour monitoring The cycle provides contour monitoring with regard to the following e Clearance angle of the active tool e Circular programming of arcs with an arc angle gt 180 degrees With relief cut elements the cycle checks whether the machining is possible using the active tool If the cycle detects that this machining will result in a contour violation it will be aborted after alarm 61604 Active tool violates programmed contour has been output If the tool clearance angle is specified with zero in the tool compensation
143. ct No for DHCP you must enter the IP address which must belong to the same network as that of your PC PG and subnet mask manually Press this softkey to save the configuration If you select Yes for DHCP you also need to restart the control system to activate the network configuration Start the AMM on your PC PG Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 45 10 11 12 9 5 2 2 Select the new network connection option in the following dialog anome Please select the connection which you want to establish Available connections Control information Control IP Control name Remote display IP bier I L LOnnecoon id Direct Connecton 169 254 11 22 Direct Connecton 192 168 215 1 169 New network connection ers not possible direct connection 169 254 1L 22 Port 5900 This dialog can also be called with the button from the toolbar The dialog for setting the new network connection appears Assign the parameters for a new network connection in this dialog Available connections Control IP control name 172 16 202 200 Port Connection name Login Password ai or SSH key file Remote monitor 172 16 202 200 IP name V Same as the control Port Transmission mode Select the following button to save the settings LLL Save as new connection Select the following butt
144. ction for rotary axis spindle Angle for the specification of a Straight line for the contour definition Aperture angle for circular interpolation Indirect cycle call Chamfer general use Chamfer in the contour definition Radius for circular interpolation 240 0 001 999 999 Acceleration override for an axis or spindle specified as a percentage It is also possible to specify the dimensions for the end point of a rotary axis with ACP irrespective of G90 G91 also applies to spindle positioning It is also possible to specify the dimensions for the end point of a rotary axis with ACN irrespective of G90 G91 also applies to spindle positioning 0 00001 359 99999 Specified in degrees one possibility of specifying a straight line when using GO or G1 if only one end point coordinate of the plane is known or if the complete end point is known with contour ranging over several blocks 0 00001 359 99999 Specified in degrees one possibility of defining the circle when using G2 G3 Special form of the cycle call no parameter transfer the name of the cycle is stored in a variable only intended for cycle internal use 0 001 999 999 99 Inserts a chamfer of the specified chamfer length between two contour blocks 0 001 999 999 99 Inserts a chamfer of the specified leg length between two contour blocks 0 010 999 999 Negative sign for selecti
145. ction path is always measured according to the programmed measuring system inch or metric Programming example Thread chain You can use this program to produce a thread chain starting with a cylindrical thread The infeed is performed vertically to the thread neither finishing allowance nor starting point offset are programmed Five roughing cuts and one noncut are performed The machining type is defined as longitudinal external with constant cross section of cut N10 G95 T5 D1 S1000 M4 Specification of technology values Programming and Operating Manual Turning 184 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 N20 GO X40 Z10 Approach starting position N30 GY CLES Cp 3S0 530 S0 BOC p ASO pn MOOR Uy Oh Oy Cycle cali O29 sy wee coy wp Glee Se ar Sr Ey N40 GO X55 Traverse axis by axis N50 210 N60 X40 N70 M2 End of program 9 5 8 Thread cutting CYCLE99 Programming CYCLE99 SPL DM1 FPL DM2 APP ROP TDEP FAL IANG NSP NRC NID PIT VARI NUMTH _VRT 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 PITA 0 0 0 PSYS Parameters ROP REAL Run outpath enterwithoutsign S O Thread depth enter without sign Finishing allowance enter without sign IANG REAL Infeed angle Range of values gt 0 Infeed along the rear flank lt 0 Infeed along the front flank 0 Infeed at a right angle to the cutting direction REAL Starting point offset for the first thread turn enter without sign NRC O ON o Number of roughing cuts enter without sign
146. ctive traverse to radius position X30 N40 DIAMON Diameter dimensions active N50 Gl X70 2 20 Traverse to diameter position X70 and Z 20 N60 Z 30 N70 DIAM9O diameter programming for absolute dimension and radius programming for incremental dimension N80 G91 X10 2 20 Incremental dimension N90 G90 X10 Absolute dimensions N100 M30 End of program Note A programmable offset with TRANS X or ATRANS X is always evaluated as radius dimensioning Description of this function see the next section 8 2 5 Programmable work offset TRANS ATRANS Functionality The programmable work offset can be used e for recurring shapes arrangements in various positions on the workpiece e when selecting a new reference point for the dimensioning e asa stock allowance when roughing This results in the current workpiece coordinate system The rewritten dimensions use this as a reference The offset is possible in all axes Note In the X axis the workpiece zero should be in the turning center due to the functions of diameter programming DIAMON and constant cutting speed G96 For this reason use no offset or only a small offset e g as allowance in the X axis Programming and Operating Manual Turning 58 6FC5398 5DP 10 0BA1 08 2013 See the following effect of the programmable offset Workpiece original Actual Z Actual Z Workpiece Programming TRANS Z programmable offset deletes old instructions fo
147. d at the same STARTFIFO separate time block end of filling Special function the next block STOPRE separate block is only decoded if the block before STOPRE is completed TRANSMIT Milling of the face end Kinematic transformation TRANSMIT separate available only if configured block accordingly TRANSMIT 1 also possible Disables all the kinematic TRAFOOF separate transformations block TRACYL Milling of the peripheral Kinematic transformation TRACYL 20 4 separate surface available only if configured block cylinder diameter accordingly 20 4 mm TRACYL 20 4 1 also possible TRAFOOF Disable TRANSMIT TRACYL Trademarks All names identified by are registered trademarks of Siemens AG The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described Since variance cannot be precluded entirely we cannot guarantee full consistency However the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions Siemens AG Industry Sector Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013
148. diagnostics Selects the user interface language Note that the HMI is automatically restarted when a new language Sets the NC PLC and HMI start up modes Enters the corresponding password manufacturer password and end user password for different is selected Sets the system date and time and adjusts the 3 Configures the access right for the remote control brightness of the screen through the Ethernet connection Backs up and restores system data Switches to the ISO programming mode _ Creates and restores startup archives data archive 45 Saves the contents of the volatile memory into a non volatile memory area Performs the axis optimization pe Programming and Operating Manual Turning 52 6FC5398 5DP 10 0BA1 08 2013 An extended horizontal softkey bar can be accessed via this key on the PPU Two extended horizontal softkeys are provided Ly ERE Views the service information displ Serv Dp planr For more information about the softkey functions in this operating area refer to the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Diagnostics Manual Defines the maintenance planner T Data backup Backing up files by copying and pasting In the program management operating area program files or directories can be copied into another directory or onto a different drive by means of copying and pasting operations Operating sequence T 1 Select the desired operating area MANAGER 2 Enter the program directory 3 3 S
149. digits to obtain a higher number of addresses In this case the value must be assigned using an equality sign R Arithmetic parameters H H function I J K Interpolation parameters intermediate point M Special function M affecting the spindle with other options S Spindle speed Examples R10 6 234 H5 12 1 11 32 67 M2 5 S1 400 A 14 Character set The following characters are used for programming They are interpreted in accordance with the relevant definitions Letters digits A B C D E F G K I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V WX Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 No distinction is made between lowercase and uppercase letters Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 231 Printable special characters Open parenthesis Inverted commas Close parenthesis Underscore belongs to letters Open square bracket Decimal point Close square bracket Comma separator lt less than Comment start gt greater than Reserved do not use Main block end of label amp Reserved do not use Assignment part of equation Reserved do not use i skip System variable identifiers Multiplication Reserved do not use Addition and positive sign Reserved do not use Subtraction minus sign Non printable special characters LF End of block character Blank Separator between words blank Tab character Reserved do not use A 15 Block format Functionality A block
150. dius or chamfer the radius or chamfer must be specified explicitly as follows e Close contour input key enter radius chamfer accept element The result then corresponds exactly to what would occur if the closing element were to be entered with the radius or chamfer Close contour can only be used for entering contour elements in polar coordinates if the starting point of the contour was set to polar and the same pole is still valid when the contour is closed Input switchover Cartesian polar The following contour elements can be entered optionally in polar coordinates only after a pole has been defined whether this was done at the outset or later in the process e Circular arcs e Straight lines horizontal vertical any direction To switchover between Cartesian and polar coordinates additional toggle fields are displayed in the programming windows for the contour elements of oblique lines and circular arcs A toggle field is not displayed if no pole exists Input fields and display fields are then only available for Cartesian values Absolute incremental input Absolute and incremental polar coordinates can be input for polar Cartesian The input fields and display fields are labeled ink and abs Absolute polar coordinates are defined by an absolute distance to the pole that is always positive and an angle in the range of 0 360 When absolute dimensions are specified the angular reference is based on a horizontal
151. drawing G90 abs G91 incr dimensioning dimensioning Absolute dimensioning G90 With absolute dimensioning the dimensioning data refers to the zero of the coordinate system currently active workpiece or current workpiece coordinate system or machine coordinate system This is dependent on which offsets are currently active programmable settable or no offsets Upon program start G90 is active for all axes and remains active until it is deselected in a subsequent block by G91 incremental dimensioning data modally active Incremental dimensioning G91 With incremental dimensioning the numerical value of the path information corresponds to the axis path to be traversed The leading sign indicates the traversing direction G91 applies to all axes and can be deselected in a subsequent block by G90 absolute dimensioning Specification with AC IC After the end point coordinate write an equality sign The value must be put in round brackets Absolute dimensioning is also possible for center points using AC Otherwise the reference point for the circle center is the circle starting point Programming example N10 G90 X20 290 Absolute dimensions N20 X75 Z IC 32 X dimensions remain absolute incremental Z dimension N180 G91 X40 Z2 Switch over to incremental dimensioning N190 X 12 Z AC 17 X remains incremental dimensioning Z absolute Programming and Operating Manual Turning 56 6FC5398 5DP 10
152. dwhee 1 9 lt n 11 x 12 10 100 Press this softkey to open the basic machine data list Use the cursor keys or the following softkey to search for the general machine data 14512 USER_DATA_HEX 16 Search Select Bit7 by using the following key and cursor keys Press the following softkey to confirm your input v OK Press this vertical softkey to activate the value change Note that the control system restarts to accept the new value After the control system has booted select the desired operating area Press this key on the MCP Press this vertical softkey to open the handwheel assignment window Select the desired handwheel number with the cursor left right key Press the relevant axis softkey for handwheel assignment or deselection The symbol 1 that appears in the window indicates a handwheel has been assigned to the specific axis Handwheel Select the required override increment The selected axis can now be moved with the handwheel The override increment is 0 001 mm The override increment is 0 010 mm The override increment is 0 100 mm Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP 10 0BA1 08 2013 3 2 4 Activating the spindle Operating sequence M 1 Select the desired operating area a MACHINE W 2 Switch to JOG mode 3 Open the T S M window 4 Enter the desired value for the spindle speed in the T S M window O Pre
153. e and the setpoint of the spindle speed r p m A 6 1 Setting the relative coordinate system REL Operating sequence M 1 Select the desired operating area E MACHINE AM 2 Switch to JOG mode UL JOG 3 Press this softkey to switch the display to the relative coordinate system 4 Use the cursor keys to select the input field and then enter the new position value of the reference point in the relative coordinate system REL Position Repos of fset x 1 on 248 H 666 mm 1 5 200 H 666 mm 5 Use this key or move the cursor to confirm your entries You can use the following vertical softkeys to set the reference point to zero Set the X axis to zero kE Set the Z axis to zero H Add Set the spindle to zero one Oll Set all axes to zero to zero Programming and Operating Manual Turning 206 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 A 6 2 Setting the JOG data Operating sequence 4 1 Select the desired operating area M MACHINE NNN 2 Switch to JOG mode VL JOG 3 Press this horizontal softkey to open the following window LY Sett JOG Feedrate 6 688 mm min Variable increment A inc 4 Enter values in the input fields and confirm your entries Suitch O If necessary press this vertical softkey to switch between the metric and inch dimension systems nm gt inch 7 Press this softkey to confirm your change OK Press this softkey to exit Cancel A T The help system The SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED c
154. e angle G2 G3 and specification of aperture angle center point end point End point X Z e g G2 ARS X Z Angle AR Starting point X Z Starting point X Z G2 G3 remains active until canceled by another instruction from this G group GO G1 The path velocity is determined by the programmed F word Programming G2 G3 X Y J End point and center point G2 G3 CR X Y Circle radius and end point G2 G3 AR I J Opening angle and center point G2 G3 AR X Y Opening angle and end point G2 G3 AP RP Polar coordinates circle around the pole Note Further possibilities for circle programming result from CT circle with tangential connection and CIP circle via intermediate point See next sections Entering tolerances for the circle Circles are only accepted by the control system with a certain dimensional tolerance The circle radius at the starting and end points are compared here If the difference is within the tolerance the center point is exactly set internally Otherwise an alarm message is issued The tolerance value can be set via machine data Programming and Operating Manual Turning 14 6FC5398 5DP 10 0BA1 08 2013 Programming example Definition of center point and end point Start point End point N5 G90 230 X40 Starting point circle for N10 N10 G2 Z250 X40 K10 I 7 End point and center point Note Center point values refer
155. e jump condition value not zero is satisfied the jump takes place The jump destination can be a block with a label or with a block number This block must be located within the program Conditional jump instructions require a separate block Several conditional jump instructions can be located in the same block Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 113 By using conditional program jumps you can also considerably shorten the program if necessary Programming IF condition GOTOF label Jump forward IF condition GOTOB label Jump backwards GOTOF Jump direction forward in the direction of the last block of the program GOTOB Jump direction backwards in the direction of the first block of the program Label Selected string for the label jump label or block number IF Introduction of the jump condition Condition Arithmetic parameter arithmetic expression for formulating the condition Comparison operations Operators Meaning S O Equal to Not equal to p lt fess tha o O lt lessthanorequalto O OOOO SSS The comparison operations support formulating of a jump condition Arithmetic expressions can also be compared The result of comparison operations is satisfied or not satisfied Not satisfied sets the value to zero Programming example for comparison operators R1 gt 1 R1 greater than 1 t lt RI 1 less than R1 RI lt R2 R3 R1 less than R2 plus R
156. e log on details and enter the corresponding password or alternatively select a key file in the dialog If the authentication data for the direct connection has already been saved a connection to the control system will be set up immediately Click this button and the AMM tool connects to the control system selected Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Establishing a network connection Proceed as follows to establish a network connection 1 2 SYSTEM 0 A SHIFT ALARM 4 Service 9 network 6 T Save 8 ps Connect the control system with the local network using an Ethernet cable Select the desired operating area on the PPU Press this key to view the extended softkeys Enter the main screen of the service control options through the following softkey operations AY Serv Service displ control Press this softkey to enter the window for the network configuration Note make sure the following vertical softkey is not selected Direct connect Configure the network as required in the following window Hetwork configuration Local data Protocol TCP IP DHCP Yes Cmpt nane HONAKE_HCU IP address ive 16 ZBZ 26H Subnet mask 255 255 255 Gateway DHS 1 2i a DHS Domain test comT Honitoring time 3H HAC address 6 1c 66 f fF b 58 You can configure the DHCP with the following key SELECT Note if you sele
157. e parameterization window If the contour element can be represented geometrically it is highlighted accordingly in the graphic display area i e the color of the contour element changes from white to black Modifying contour element You can use the cursor keys to select a programmed contour element in the contour chain Press E this key to display the parameter input fields The parameters can now be edited Insert a contour element Use the cursor keys in the contour chain to select the contour element in front of the position for the new element Then select the contour element to be inserted from the softkey bar After you have configured the parameters for the new contour element confirm the insert operation by pressing the following softkey Accept element Subsequent contour elements are updated automatically according to the new contour status Programming and Operating Manual Turning 220 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Delete contour element Delete element softkey and confirm the query Close the contour Close i contour the starting point Undo an input Use the cursor keys to select the element you wish to delete The selected contour symbol and associated contour element in the programming graphic are highlighted in red Then press this By pressing this softkey you can close the contour from the actual position with a straight line to By selecting this softkey you can return to the main screen without
158. e point M Machine zero point W Workpiece zero machine i Workpiece Z actual position machine Figure 3 2 Determining the length offsets using the example of a drill Length 1 Z axis F Toolholder reference point M Machine zero point W Workpiece zero The offset value in the X axis is a diameter value X machine Workpiece X actual position Z actual position machine Figure 3 3 Determining the length offsets using the example of a milling tool Programming and Operating Manual Turning 22 6FC5398 5DP 10 0BA1 08 2013 Operating sequence Measuring the tool in the X direction M SS MACHINE WW UL JOG D Heas tool Heasure x amp gt x lt ot HAND WHEEL o ak Set length xX 1 Select the desired operating area Switch to JOG mode Open the manual tool measurement window Press this vertical softkey to measure the tool in the X direction Move the tool to approach the workpiece in the X direction Switch to handwheel control mode Select a suitable override feedrate and then use the handwheel to move the tool to scratch the required workpiece edge or the edge of the setting block if it is used Enter the workpiece diameter in the field for example 50 Tool measurenent manual 4 T 1 D 1 Ssa mm Length xiL H HHH mn Note For a milling tool with edge position 5 or 7 the radius of the tool itself is disp
159. e to omit the switchover from plane G18 to G17 when the deep hole drilling cycle is used on turning machines The identifiers have the following meanings Plane Designation __ Infeed direction 1st axis of the current plane is X 2nd axis of the current plane is Y 3rd axis of the current plane is Z 1st axis of the current plane is Z 2nd axis of the current plane is X 3rd axis of the current plane is Y 1 1st axis of the current plane is Y 1 2nd axis of the current plane is Z 3rd axis of the current plane is X 1 If Y axis is present For example to machine a center hole in Z in the G17 plane you can program G17 AXN 3 Deep hole tapping VARI DAM VRT With the VARI parameter it is possible to distinguish between simple tapping VARI 0 and deep hole tapping VARI 0 In conjunction with deep hole tapping it is possible to choose between chip breaking retraction by variable distance from current drilling depth parameter VRT VARI 1 and chip removal withdrawal from reference plane VARI 2 These functions work analogously to the normal deep hole drilling cycle CYCLE83 The incremental drilling depth for one pass is specified via parameter DAM The cycle internally calculates the intermediate depth as follows e The programmed incremental drilling depth is executed in each step until the rest up to the final drilling depth is less than lt 2x DAM e The remaining drilling depth is halved and executed
160. e to the final drilling depth SDIS safety clearance The safety clearance SDIS acts with reference to the reference plane This is brought forward by the safety clearance The direction in which the safety clearance is active is automatically determined by the cycle Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 127 DP and DPR final drilling depth The final drilling depth can be specified either absolute DP or relative DPR to the reference plane With relative specification the cycle will calculate the resulting depth automatically using the positions of reference and retraction planes See the following illustration for final drilling depth DP RFP DPR Note If a value is entered both for DP and for DPR the final drilling depth is derived from DPR If this differs from the absolute depth programmed via DP the message Depth Corresponding to value for relative depth is output in the message line If the values for reference and retraction planes are identical a relative depth specification is not permitted The error message 61101 Reference plane defined incorrectly is output and the cycle is not executed This error message is also output if the retraction plane is located after the reference plane i e its distance to the final drilling depth is smaller Programming example Drilling_centering This program produces three drill holes using the CYCLE81 drilling cycle The drilling axis is alw
161. e turning center The figure below shows an example of the workpiece coordinate system X workpiece Workpiece Z Workpiece W workpiece zero Relative coordinate system REL In addition to the machine and workpiece coordinate systems the control system provides a relative coordinate system This coordinate system is used to set reference points that can be freely selected and have no influence on the active workpiece coordinate system All axis movements are displayed relative to these reference points Clamping the workpiece For machining the workpiece is clamped on the machine The workpiece must be aligned such that the axes of the workpiece coordinate system run in parallel with those of the machine Any resulting offset of the machine zero with reference to the workpiece zero is determined along the Z axis and entered in a data area intended for the settable work Programming and Operating Manual Turning 16 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 offset In the NC program this offset is activated during program execution for example using a programmed G54 command The figure below shows an example of the workpiece clamped on the machine X workpiece Workpiece ZWorkpiece Current workpiece coordinate system The programmed work offset TRANS Page 58 can be used to generate an offset with reference to the workpiece coordinate system resulting in the current workpiece coordinate system 3 2 Setting up tools 3 2 1
162. eaeeeseeeseeeeaaes Programming UO ON arse a vc ca E E E EEA etc ee ein E A A sein a wo vg dtc Vda ed canes Defining a Start DOING ce cccccececeeeeeeee cee eeeee ee eeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeesaeeeeeseeeeessaeeeesaaeeeesegeeesaeeeeesaeeees Programming contour SSE esc ct ice ec ehesstccet tase cst cate ed eles Sb cca wknd alee ee gues Sad delete Buea AE Aaa Parameters for Contour ClEMENHS c cccccececcscececcececcececcececcececueceauececuauesueueauaneauauesuetesustesueueaesueseeneaees Undercuts for Specifying contour elements in polar coordinates Cycle support Programming IV UME ATMS CG TINO LOY sis cic oe erences RE EE gens EnA ENTREE KESKEN ENSAR Aa AN EA EEEIEE example for turning application eccccccccsecce cere ccevcseceesd Menceesncecaest ensieeseeses ch ceecesesblaneesddeeaeneee Word SIFUC TURE and ACCS SS x oir hese eee ee ieee ose eg osetia Pek ae eet ec a aada Character set Block format PTS I UNS UU ONS nase sce ace ns sacs sect cea ek Se een ees ec Sa eee Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 1 Introduction 1 1 SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED operator panels 1 1 1 Overview The SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED PPU Panel Processing Unit is available in the following variants e PPU161 2 Horizontal panel layout applicable for the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED T turning or SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED M milling control system e PPU160 2 Vertical panel layout
163. earance using G1 and the same feedrate value e Retraction to the retraction plane with GO Explanation of the parameters For an explanation of the parameters RTP RFP SDIS DP and DPR refer to Section Drilling centering CYCLE81 Pao TOF See the following parameters for CYCLE89 DTB dwell time The dwell time to the final drilling depth chip breakage is programmed under DTB in seconds Programming example Fifth boring At X0 the CYCLE89 drilling cycle is called with a safety clearance of 5 mm and specification of the final drilling depth as an absolute value The drilling axis is the Z axis N10 G90 G17 F100 S450 M4 Specification of technology values N20 GO X0 2107 Approach drilling position N30 CYCLE89 107 102 5 72 3 Cycle call N40 M2 End of program 9 5 Turning cycles 9 5 1 Requirements Call and return conditions The G functions effective prior to the cycle call remain active beyond the cycle Programming and Operating Manual Turning 150 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Plane definition The machining plane must be defined prior to the cycle call With turning it is usually the G18 ZX plane The two axes of the current plane in turning are hereinafter referred to as the longitudinal axis first axis of this plane and transverse axis second axis of this plane In the turning cycles with diameter programming active the second axis is taken into account as the transverse axis in all cases
164. ed in a separate block Basic instructions with regard to the assignment of standard cycle parameters Each defined parameter of a cycle has a certain data type The parameter being used must be specified when the cycle is called The following can be transferred in the parameter list e R parameters only numerical values e Constants If R parameters are used in the parameter list they must first be assigned values in the calling program Proceed as follows to call the cycles e with an incomplete parameter list or e by leaving out parameters If transfer parameters are omitted at the end of the parameter list the parameter list must be prematurely ended with If any parameters are to be omitted within the list a comma must be written as a placeholder No plausibility checks are made for parameter values with a limited range of values unless an error response has been specifically described for a cycle When calling the cycle if the parameter list contains more entries than parameters are defined in the cycle the general NC alarm 12340 Too many parameters is displayed and the cycle is not executed Note Axis specific and channel specific machine data of the spindle must be configured Cycle call The individual methods for writing a cycle are shown in the programming examples provided for the individual cycles Simulation of cycles Programs with cycle calls can be tested first in simulation During simul
165. ed mode Programming Position spindle SPOS lt value gt SPOSA lt value gt M19 M lt n gt 19 Switch spindle over to axis mode M70 M lt n gt 70 Define end of motion criterion FINEA FINEA S lt n gt COARSEA COARSEA S lt n gt I POENDA I POENDA S lt n gt I POBRKA I POBRKA lt axis gt lt instant in time gt Programming in a separate NC block Synchronize spindle movements WAITS WAITS lt n gt lt m gt Programming in a separate NC block Significance SPOS SPOSA Set spindle to specified angle SPOS and SPOSA have the same functionality but differ in their block change behavior e spos delays the enabling of the NC block until the position has been reached SPOSA enables the NC block even if the position has not been reached lt value gt Angular position to which the spindle is to be set Unit degrees Type REAL The following options are available about programming the position approach mode AC lt value gt Absolute dimensions Range of values 0 359 9999 IC lt value gt Incremental dimensions Range of values 0 99 999 999 DC lt value gt Approach absolute value directly ACN lt value gt Absolute dimension approach in negative direction ACP lt value gt Absolute dimension approach in positive direction lt value gt aS DC lt value gt Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 89 M lt n gt 19 Set the spindle
166. ed page Searches for a term in the current topic c Continues search for the next term that matches the search criteria ont inue search Exits the help system Programming and Operating Manual Turning 208 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Keys for handling Window Continue search Expands hierarchical topics Collapses hierarchical topics Navigates upwards through the hierarchical topics Navigates downwards through the hierarchical topics Opens the selected topic in the current topic relevant window Functions the same as pressing the following key Searches for a term in the current topic Continues search for the next term that matches the search criteria Exits the help system A 8 Operation wizard The operation wizard provides step by step guides on basic commissioning and operation procedures Operating sequence 3 k MENU FUNCTION A Start 3 assistant Press this key on the PPU to call the operation wizard Ae x Jog Operation assistant Guide the user through the first steps of the machine operation Assistant Create a nev tool and measure the tool Create a part progran Simulate the progran Use the cursor keys to select a step of the machining operation Press this softkey to start the onboard assistant Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 209 4 Press this softkey to enter the next page Next D Press this sof
167. ed to define the starting point of a groove starting from which the form is calculated in the cycle The cycle determines its own starting point For an external groove movement begins in the direction of the longitudinal axis for an internal groove in the direction of the facing axis Grooves at bent contour elements can be realized differently Depending on the form and radius of the bend either a paraxial straight line can be laid over the maximum of the bend or a tangential oblique line can be created in a point of the edge points of the groove Radii and chamfers at the groove edge make sense with bent contours only if the appropriate edge point is on the straight line specified for the cycle Programming and Operating Manual Turning 156 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 See the following illustration for the parameters for CYCLEQ3 WIDG and DIAG groove width and groove depth The parameters groove width WIDG and groove depth DIAG are used to define the form of the groove In its calculation the cycle always assumes the point programmed under SPD and SPL If the groove width is larger than that of the active tool the width is removed in several steps When doing so the whole width is distributed by the cycle equally The maximum infeed is 95 of the tool width after deduction of the cutting edge radii This provides a cutting overlap If the programmed groove width is smaller than the real tool width the error message 61602 To
168. ed via the sign of the lead e g K as with M3 as with M4 Thread interpolation retraction G332 Z K tapping without compensating chuck e g in Z axis retraction motion sign of lead as for G331 G4 Dwell time 2 Special motions dwell time G4 F separate block F non modal Time in seconds or G4 S separate block S in spindle revolutions G74 Reference point approach G74 X 0 Z 0 separate block machine axis identifier G75 Fixed point approach G75 X 0 Z 0 separate block machine axis identifier TRANS Translation programmable 3 Write memory non modal TRANS X Z separate block SCALE Programmable scaling factor SCALE X Z scaling factor in the direction of Rotation programmable the specified axis separate block MIRROR Programmable mirroring ATRANS Additive translation programming ASCALE Additive programmable scaling factor Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 235 ROT RPL rotation in the current plane G17 to G19 separate block MIRROR XO mirror the coordinate axis separate block ATRANS X Z separate block ASCALE X Z scaling factor in the direction of the specified axis separate block Address Significance Value Information Programming assignments AROT RPL rotation in the current plane G17 to G19 separate block AROT Additive programmable rotation AMIRROR XO mir
169. edited values to the system using coordinates or an angle Opens the window for programming a circular arc with Returns to the program editor with the last edited values any direction of rotation transferred to the system Further softkey functions The following softkeys are available in corresponding contour element window for programming the contour elements on the basis of pre assigned parameters Tangent to preceding element T This softkey presets the angle a2 to a value of 0 The contour element has a tangential transition to angent i i trang the preceding element i e the angle to the preceding element a2 is set to 0 degree Display all parameters All Press this softkey to display a selection list of all the parameters for the selected contour element If para f waters you leave any parameter input fields blank the control assumes that you do not know the right 7 values and attempts to calculate these from the settings of the other parameters The contour is always machined in the programmed direction Input switchover Alter This softkey is displayed only in cases where the cursor is positioned on an input field with several native switchover settings Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 219 Select dialog Dialog Some parameter configurations can produce several different contour characteristics In such Sel eee cases you will be asked to select a dialog By c
170. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeeas 5 5 2 3 Transferring from external through Ethernet connection 5 6 Machining at a specific POINK ee eccceececeeeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeseaeessaeeeseeeeseeeseacessaeeeseueeseasessaeesseeeesaueeseneesanees SAVING SV SIGINT dalasa AAA EOR EA EER AAE AAE a EE RAA Saree AAA RNAAR Beee at o APEE E E E E E E E E E P A E EE TEA A E A E Programming PONCIDIGS ssis aE E E 8 1 Fundamentals of programming ccccsssccccsececceeececceuseccceseeeceuueeesauececseueeessaueeessueeessegeeessueeessgeeessaneeenes Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 3 8 7 3 Co 00 00 0O 0O OO CO OO OO OO OO m a M M M M MA a M M M M M A OONOOKRWD NO Program names Program structure Positional data Programming CIRNNGNSIONS caisscnisinred adatienusamenaaiornidanhcss aS a E aa aR Absolute incremental dimensioning G90 G91 AC IC oo cece ccccceseeceseeeeceeeesseeeeseeceseeseseeeesseeeesneeesaes Dimensions in metric units and inches G71 G70 G710 G700 eee eccececceceeceseeeeeeeaeseeaeseeaeeneaeens Radius diameter dimensions DIAMOF DIAMON DIAM90 0 00 00 cece ec eececceceececeeceseeeeseeaeceeaeeeeaeeneaeens Programmable work offset TRANS ATRANS cccccecccesececeececeeceeeeceseeeeeeeeeeseceseeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeesseeesaaees Programmable scaling factor SCALE ASCALE
171. eeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeesaneeesaeeeeeaeeeeesaees 8 16 3 Executing external subroutines EXT CALL cccccccecececeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesaaeeeeseeeeesaeeensaeeeneas 8 17 Timers and workpiece counters cccceccceecceecceuceceeecsueceueeceeceuecsaeesaeesueceueesaeeseueesueesaeessuessueesaeesaeesaaes 8 17 1 RUNUME UMO Prece E E drawn ueauaemennancicianiets 8 17 2 Workpiece COUNNGES cessie ne e EE E EREE EE EEE EE E 9 Eo c E EE PET S A E EE E A A E E A A E AE AEE E N EE 9 1 Overview Of CYCIES aca ssc sien ceececesnes conaeoneaenterctedaaieeeianeccneeoos1sesausieneedeeseeeieas eccacem aceon disetecaeiaeesceeesaceess 9 2 FON AUN CY ClO S ai tesa en cata onstataeienOnlotdwentsucdntohd icine iunduetilend wiaetaaduiiatald weinagusGedend incetandentadadiniintanaanGedanhieis 9 3 Graphical cycle Support in the program ECItOM ccccccccceecceseececeececeeeeeeeceeseeeeseeceseecesseeessueeeseeeesaeeesanees 9 4 PRINT OS aia ac seyntenncs tetcers Se santa oa cs a ta ia ie wats eae oe aes ne peste Uaaeateste ues exh ta sco diesie gas E E 9 4 1 General Il OM AON aces co2ece tenntanefasuencutens sacsissicteneheustaaademacee hentiac uessweseademscesedehecaeadeamenasienecsoutannieaseemeasattente 9 4 2 REQUIFEMENMS ccccceecceecccececeeeceueecaeeceeceueesaeesueceueesaeesaueseueesaeesaeeseueesaeesaeessueesueesaeessuessueeseeesseesaueeseeens 9 4 3 Drilling centering CYCLES cissicccesecc cccdede
172. egative Left hand as with M4 Axis velocity For G331 G332 the velocity of the axis for the thread length results from the spindle speed and the thread lead The feedrate F is not relevant It is however stored However the maximum axis velocity rapid traverse defined in the machine data can not be exceeded This will result in an alarm Programming example Metric thread 5 lead according to the table 0 8 mm rev hole already premachined N10 G54 GO G90 X10 Z5 Approach starting point N20 SPOS 0 Spindle in position control N30 G331 Z 25 K0 8 S600 Thread grinding K positive Clockwise rotation of spindle end point 25 mm N40 G332 Z5 K0 8 Retraction N50 G0 X10 Z5 N60 M30 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 82 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 8 6 Fixed point approach 8 6 1 Fixed point approach G75 Functionality By using G75 a fixed point on the machine e g tool change point can be approached The position is stored permanently in the machine data for all axes A maximum of four fixed points can be defined for each axis No offset is effective The velocity of each axis is its rapid traverse G75 requires a separate block and acts non modal The machine axis identifier must be programmed In the part program block after G75 the previous G command of the Interpolation type group GO G1 G2 is active again Programming G75 FP lt n gt X 0 Z 0 Note FPn is referencing with axis machine d
173. elect the program file or directory to be backed up You can alternatively use the following softkey to search for the desired file or directory Search 4 Press this softkey to copy the data to the clipboard Copy 5 Select a desired directory or drive as the data target To back up the files onto an USB stick USB netas To back up the files onto an external PC PG This requires a connected network A TE drive on the control system For more information about the connection settings refer to Section Executing transferring through the Ethernet connection Page 43 OEH To back up the files in the folder for storing the manufacturer files on the control fw cles system This folder is visible with the manufacturer password User To back up the files in the folder for storing end user files on the control system L files 6 Press this softkey to paste the copied data into the current directory Paste Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 53 Backing up files via RS232 interface The program files can be backed up onto an external PC PG via the RS232 interface Operating sequence Connect the control system with the PC PG using an RS232 cable 1 2 Configure the communication settings for the RS232 interface see Section Configuring RS232 communication Page 40 amas 3 Press this button on the main screen of SinuComPCIN and input the name for the text file for Data example Test txt
174. end Data execution for example Test mpf The data transferring starts On the NC side Receiving of data 1152606 68 1 HOHE _N_TEST_HMPF RS232 N_MPF_DIR 11688 On the SinuComPCIN side 11776 Bytes send of 33761636 File 0 04 Falcon D ata for test customer mp moditedstest MPF Abort eee ae Metal ae 5 Wait until SinuComPCIN has finished data transfer and click this button Transfer 5 5 2 Executing transferring through the Ethernet connection 5 5 2 1 Configuring the Ethernet connection Communication tool Access MyMachine P2P AMM With the tool Access MyMachine P2P AMM installed on your PC PG you can enable the Ethernet connection between a SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED control system and a PC PG This tool is available in the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Toolbox and is supported by Windows XP Vista Win 7 For more information about the AMM tool refer to SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Commissioning Manual Ethernet connections The following Ethernet connections are possible between the control system and the AMM tool on the PC PG e Direct connection direct connection between the control system and PC PG e Network connection integrating the control system into an existing Ethernet network Establishing a direct connection Proceed as follows to establish a direct connection between the control system and a PC PG 1 Connect the control system with the PC PG using an Ethernet cable A DAN 2 Select the desired operating area on the PPU
175. eng depth relate te ie reference pane enter wout sgn DTB REL Dwell time at final Dwell time at final riling depth chip breakage depth chip breakage pM a Values 3 for M3 4 for M4 RPA INT __ Retraction path along the st axis of the plane incremental enter with sign pss fr rea pamer ony Pe aetate opose Function The cycle supports the boring of holes with a boring bar The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate velocity up to the entered drilling depth With boring 2 oriented spindle stop is activated once the drilling depth has been reached Then the programmed retraction positions are approached in rapid traverse and from there the retraction plane CYCLE86 can be applied on a turning machine only with TRANSMIT in the G17 plane and with a driven tool Fore more information about TRANSMIT function see Section Milling on turned parts TRANSMIT Page 62 Sequence Position reached prior to cycle start The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane The cycle creates the following sequence of motions e Approach of the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance by using GO e Traversing to final drilling depth with G1 and the feedrate programmed prior to the cycle call e Dwell time to final drilling depth e Oriented spindle stop at the spindle position programmed under POSS Programming and Operating Manual Turning 144 6FC5398 5DP10
176. erved The same rules apply as for the names of main programs Example BUCHSE7 It is also possible to use the address word L in subroutines The value can have 7 decimal places integers only Please observe With address L leading zeros are meaningful for differentiation Example L128 ist nicht L0128 oder L00128 Dies sind 3 verschiedene Unterprogramme Note The subroutine name LL6 is reserved for tool change Subroutine call Subroutines are called in a program main or subprogram with their names To do this a separate block is required Example N10 L785 Subprogram call L785 N20 SHAFT Subprogram call SHAFT Program repetition P If a subroutine is to be executed several times in succession write the number of times it is to be executed in the block of the call after the subroutine name under the address P A maximum of 9 999 cycles are possible P1 P9999 Example N10 L785 P3 Subprogram call L785 3 cycles Nesting depth Subroutines can also be called from a subroutine not only from a main program In total up to 8 program levels are available for this type of nested call including the main program level See the following illustration for execution with 8 program levels 1st level 2nd level 3rd level ae 8th level Main Program Subprogram Subprogram Subprogram Information Modal G functions can be changed in the subroutine e g G90 gt G91 When returning to the calling prog
177. esaeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeesaaeeeeseeeeesseeeeesaeeees Programmable run in and run out path for G33 DITS DITE cc cccccceececeeeeeeeeesaeeeeseeeeseeeesaeeesaaees 80 Thread cutting with variable lead G34 G35 eccccccccceceeeeeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeseeeesseeeeseeeseeeessneesseeees Thread interpolation G331 G332 0 ccc ceccsececeeeeeeeeneeeceeeeaneeseeeteueeaeeneeeeeeeeaneeseeesseeeaneeteeesneesneeseeeeanes Fixed point approach Fixed POINT approach G79 esris EE sack tanned eccen ta deed cided O TE aerate Reference point approach G74 cccccccccceeeccceeeeceeeeceeeecseeeeseeeececeseueeseaeeesaueeseeessacessaeeesaeeeseeeseeeesaaees Acceleration control and exact Stop CONTINUOUS Path cc ccccecccceecceeeceeeeceeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeeaeeeseeeseeeeseeeseees Exact stop continuous path control mode G9 G60 G64 cccccseeeaeeeceeteseeaeeeseeeeeeetaeeneeeteeeeaneeaes Acceleration pattern BRISK SOFT ccccccccsceceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeneeeceeeeeneeeeeeseeeeaneeseeeteeeeaneeneeeeeeeaeeeneeees Dwell Time G4 The third axis Spindle movements Spindle speed S directions Of rotation ccc ecccceccccsecceeeeeeceeeeseeeeseeeeeaeeeeseeeeseecesseeesseeeeseuceseeeesseeesseeeees Spindle positioning Spindle positioning SPOS SPOSA M19 M70 WAITS ccccccccecccsseeeseeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeseeeesseesseeeees Spindle positioning SPOS SPOSA M19
178. experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation If products and components from other manufacturers are used these must be recommended or approved by Siemens Proper transport storage installation assembly commissioning operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with The information in the relevant documentation must be observed Siemens AG 2012 2013 All rights reserved 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 1 Preface Applicable products This manual is applicable to the following control system Control system SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED T Turning Documentation components and target groups Component User documentation Programming and Operating Manual Turning Programming and Operating Manual Milling Programming and Operating Manual ISO Turning Milling Programming and Operating Manual Manual Machine Plus Programmers and operators of turning machines Turning Diagnostics Manual Mechanical and electrical designers commissioning engineers machine operators and service and maintenance personnel Manufacturer service documentation Commissioning Manual Inst
179. eys pressed SHIFT The icons on the following keys are available only with PPU161 2 and PPU160 2 The icon on the key is a hint that you can press both lt CTRL gt and this key as shortcuts for capturing screens The icon on the key is a hint that you can press both lt CTRL gt and this key as shortcuts for saving start up archives The icon on the key is a hint that you can press both lt CTRL gt and this key as shortcuts for showing pre defined slides on the screen Programming and Operating Manual Turning 8 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 The icon on the key is a hint that you can press this key to call the calculator function Cursor keys e Toggles between entries in the input field e Enters the Set up menu dialog at NC start up Icons on both keys are available only with PPU161 2 and PPU160 2 The icon on the key is a hint that you can press both lt CTRL gt and the key to adjust the screen backlight brightness Control keys The icon on the key is available only with PPU161 2 and PPU160 2 The icon is a hint that this key can be used together with another key to function as a key combination Operating area To open the system data management operating area press the following key keys combination SYSTEM AN SHIFT ALARM Enables user defined extension applications for example generation of user dialogs with the EasyXLanguage function For more information about this function refer to SINUME
180. f a sequence of blocks see the table below Each block represents a machining step Instructions are written in the blocks in the form of words The last block in the execution sequence contains a special word for the end of the program for example M2 The following table shows you an example of the NC program structure Block Word Word Word Comment Block N10 Go x20 First block Block N20 G2 fz 37 Second block Block fnso got Block fnao fe Block nso m2 Endo program 8 2 Positional data 8 2 1 Programming dimensions In this section you will find descriptions of the commands with which you can directly program dimensions taken from a drawing This has the advantage that no extensive calculations have to be made for NC programming Note The commands described in this section stand in most cases at the start of a NC program The way in which these functions are combined is not intended to be a patent remedy For example the choice of working plane may be made at another point in the NC program The real purpose of this and the following sections is to illustrate the conventional structure of an NC program Overview of typical dimensions The basis of most NC programs is a drawing with concrete dimensions When implementing in a NC program it is helpful to take over exactly the dimensions of a workpiece drawing into the machining program These can be e Absolute dimension G90 modally effective applies
181. finishing allowances are programmed stock is removed when roughing up to the final contour FF1 FF2 and FF3 feedrate It is possible to specify different feedrates for the individual machining steps as shown in Figure NO TAG q G1 G2 G3 m GO Roughing Finishing FF3 VARI machining type The machining type can be found in the table below ao Roughing 2 PR Roughing S O Bo Routing bo Roughing o Oi Finishing o Oi Finishing S bo Finishing O Complete machining S Complete machining o Complete machining ooo Complete machining E e E A E Complete machining Programming and Operating Manual Turning 168 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 In longitudinal machining the infeed is always carried out along the transversal axis and in face machining along the longitudinal axis External machining means that the infeed is carried out in the direction of the negative axis With internal machining the infeed is carried out in the direction of the positive axis The VARI parameter is subjected to a plausibility check If its value is not in the range 1 12 when the cycle is called the cycle is aborted with alarm 61002 Machining type defined incorrectly Longitud ext VARI 1 5 9 or after rechucking Face inside V J ABIN2 Face outside VARI or after rechucking I Tea inside VARI 4 8 12 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 169
182. for all axes in the block up to revocation by G91 in a following block e Absolute dimension X AC value only this value applies only for the stated axis and is not influenced by G90 G91 This is possible for all axes and also for SPOS SPOSA spindle positionings and interpolation parameters I J K e Absolute dimension X DC value directly approaching the position by the shortest route only this value applies only for the stated rotary axis and is not influenced by G90 G91 This is also possible for SPOS SPOSA spindle positionings e Absolute dimension X ACP value approaching the position in positive direction only this value is set only for the rotary axis the range of which is set to 0 lt 360 degrees in the machine data e Absolute dimension X ACN value approaching the position in negative direction only this value is set only for the rotary axis the range of which is set to 0 lt 360 degrees in the machine data e Incremental dimension G91 modally effective applies for all axes in the block until it is revoked by G90 in a following block e Incremental dimension X IC value only this value applies exclusively for the stated axis and is not influenced by G90 G91 This is possible for all axes and also for SPOS SPOSA spindle positionings and interpolation parameters J K e Inch dimension G70 applies for all linear axes in the block until revoked by G71 in a following block e Metric dimension G71 applies for a
183. formation e TRACYL without groove wall offset TRAFO_TYPE_n 512 e TRACYL with groove wall offset TRAFO_TYPE_n 513 e TRACYL with additional linear axis and groove wall offset TRAFO_TYPE_n 514 The groove wall offset is parameterized with TRACYL using the third parameter For cylinder peripheral curve transformation with groove side compensation the axis used for compensation should be positioned at zero y 0 so that the groove centric to the programmed groove center line is finished Axis utilization The following axes cannot be used as a positioning axis or a reciprocating axis e The geometry axis in the peripheral direction of the cylinder peripheral surface Y axis e The additional linear axis for groove side compensation Z axis Programming TRACYL d or TRACYL d n or for transformation type 514 TRACYL d n groove side offset TRAFOOF Rotary axis The rotary axis cannot be programmed as it is occupied by a geometry axis and thus cannot be programmed directly as channel axis Meaning TRACYL d Activates the first TRACYL function specified in the channel machine data d is the parameter for the working diameter TRACYL d n Activates the n th TRACYL function specified in the channel machine data The maximum for n is 2 TRACYL d 1 corresponds to TRACYL q D Value for the working diameter The working diameter is double the distance between the tool tip and the turning center This diameter must always be specified
184. g 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 125 Dwell time programming The parameters for dwell times in the drilling cycles are always assigned to the F word and must therefore be assigned with values in seconds Any deviations from this procedure must be expressly stated Special features when using drilling cycles on a turning machine Simple turning machines without driven tools can apply drilling cycles only for drilling on the end face with Z axis in the turning center These drilling cycles must always be called in the G17 plane See the following example for drilling centering _ drilling on turning center without tool 35 100 108 Turning machines with driven tools can also drill off center on the end face or on the peripheral surface if the machine setup permits this The following must be observed when drilling off center on the end face e Working plane is G17 Z is the resulting tool axis e The spindle of the driven tool must be declared to the master spindle SETMS command e The drilling position can be programmed either with X and the C axis or if TRANSMIT is active with Y and Z See the following illustration for drilling on end face with a driven tool The following must be observed when drilling on the peripheral surface e Working plane is G19 X is the resulting tool axis e The spindle of the driven tool must be declared to the master spindle SETMS command Programming and Operating Manual Turning 126 6FC5398
185. g radius 7 3 mm with special feedrate FRCM modal N60 Gl X20 210 continue inserting this rounding to N70 N70 Gl X0 Z 45 RNDM 0 Modal rounding OFF N80 M30 8 10 3 Contour definition programming Functionality If direct end point values for the contour are not visible in a machining drawing angle values can also be used for straight line determination In a contour corner you can insert the elements chamfer or rounding The corresponding instruction CHR or RND is written in the block that leads to the corner Contour definition programming can be used in blocks with GO or G1 Theoretically any number of straight line blocks can be combined and a rounding or chamfer inserted in between Every straight line must be clearly identified by point values and or angle values Programming ANG Specification of angle to define a straight line RND Insert rounding value Radius of chamfer CHRe Insert chamfer value Side length of the chamfer Information If radius and chamfer are programmed in one block only the radius is inserted regardless of the programming sequence Angle ANG An angle can be entered to uniquely define the straight line path if only one end point coordinate of the plane is known for a straight line or for contours across multiple blocks the cumulative end point The angle is always referred to the Z axis normal case G18 active Positive angles are aligned counter clockwise Programming
186. g modifying the setting data Page 201 Before executing the dry run first remove the workpiece from the machine Proceed as follows to test a part program with dry run 1 Select the desired operating area M e MACHINE gt AUTO 2 Switch to AUTO mode Prog 3 Press this softkey to open the lower level menu for program control NC cont DENEI 4 Press this vertical softkey to activate the feedrate settings for the dry run feedrate 5 Press this key on the MCP to close the door in the machine if you do not use this function just close the door in the machine manually DOOR 6 Make sure the feedrate override is 0 Check that correct tool is in spindle before continuing FA T Press this key on the MCP to run the program 8 Turn the feedrate override switch slowly to the desired value 9 Press this key to stop the program test I y p prog RESET Testing the program with PRT In PRT mode you can simply check the correctness of your part program with no axis or spindle movement Proceed as follows to test a part program in PRT mode E 1 Select the desired operating area M GESS MACHINE Programming and Operating Manual Turning 38 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 2 itch to AUTO gt Switch to AUTO mode AUTO 3 Press this key on the MCP to activate the PRT mode PROGRAM Alternatively you can also activate PRT through the following softkey operations NC Prog P
187. go Mx 1 O B em MZ1 0 BBA ee Gi GS66 8 GEB Block display Current program PFE Displays the axes that exist in the machine coordinate Displays the remaining distance for the axes to system MCS workpiece coordinate system WCS or traverse relative coordinate system REL Displays the current position of the axes in the selected Displays seven subsequent blocks of the currently coordinate system active part program The display of one block is limited to the width of the window 5 1 Performing the simulation Functionality By using the broken line graphics the programmed tool path can be traced Before the automatic machining you need to perform the simulation to check whether the tool moves in the right way Operating sequence E 1 Select the desired operating area MANAGER Al 2 Select a part program for simulation 2 3 Press this key to open the program gt 4 Switch to AUTO mode AUTO Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 35 i Sinu Softkey functions Press this softkey to open the program simulation window and the program control mode PRT is automatically activated If the control system is not in the correct operating mode a message will appear at the bottom of the screen as follows If this message appears repeat Step 4 x 49 28 26 4g Z Please switch to operating mode aanu C Ei Edit Press this ke
188. groove side 11 Positioning 12 Deselect OFFN 13 TRAFOOF 14 Re select original coordinate shift frame Special features e TRC selection TRC is not programmed in relation to the groove side but relative to the programmed groove center line To prevent the tool traveling to the left of the groove side G42 is entered instead of G41 You avoid this if in OFFN the groove width is entered with a negative sign e OFFN acts differently with TRACYL than it does without TRACYL As even without TRACYL OFFN is included when TRC is active OFFN should be reset to zero after TRAFOOF e It is possible to change OFFN within a part program This could be used to shift the groove center line from the center see diagram e Guiding grooves TRACYL does not create the same groove for guiding grooves as it would be with a tool with the diameter producing the width of the groove It is basically not possible to create the same groove side geometry with a smaller cylindrical tool as it is with a larger one TRACYL minimizes the error To avoid problems of accuracy the tool radius should only be slightly smaller than half the groove width Note OFFN and TRC With TRAFO_TYPE_n 512 the value is effective under OFFN as an allowance for TRC With TRAFO_TYPE_n 513 half the groove width is programmed in OFFN The contour is retracted with OFFN TRC 8 3 Linear interpolation 8 3 1 Linear interpolation with rapid traverse GO Functionality
189. h ACN and ACP deceleration takes place if necessary and the appropriate approach direction is taken With Ic the spindle rotates additionally to the specified value starting at the current spindle position Position a spindle from standstill M5 The exact programmed distance is traversed from standstill M5 8 9 3 Gear stages Functionality Up to 5 gear stages can be configured for a spindle for speed torque adaptation Programming The relevant gear stage is selected in the program via M commands M40 Automatic gear stage selection M41 to M45 Gear stages 1 to 5 8 10 Special turning functions 8 10 1 Constant cutting rate G96 G97 Functionality Requirement A controlled spindle must be present With activated G96 function the spindle speed is adapted to the currently machined workpiece diameter transverse axis such that a programmed cutting rate S remains constant on the tool edge Spindle speed times diameter constant The S word is evaluated as the cutting rate as of the block with G96 G96 is modally effective until cancellation by another G function of the group G94 G95 G97 Programming G96 S LIMS F Constant cutting speed ON G97 Constant cutting speed OFF S Cutting rate unit of measurement m min LIMS Upper limit speed of the spindle with G96 G97 effective F Feedrate in mm revolution as for G95 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 94 6FC5398 5DP 10 0BA1 08 2013
190. h for the first thread turn with GO e Infeed for roughing according to the infeed type defined under VARI e Thread cutting is repeated according to the programmed number of roughing cuts e The finishing allowance is removed in the following step with G33 e This step is repeated according to the number of idle passes e The whole sequence of motions is repeated for each further thread turn Explanation of the parameters DM1 and DM2 diameter Use this parameter to define the thread diameter of starting and end point of the thread In the case of internal threads this is the tap hole diameter Interrelation SPL FPL APP and ROP starting end point run in and run out path See the following illustration for the parameters for CYCLE99 al The programmed starting point SPL or end point FPL constitutes the original starting point of the thread The starting point used in the cycles however is the starting point brought forward by the run in path APP The run out path Cut out begins before the programmed end point FPL It brings the end position of thread forward so that the end of cut out is equal FPL Interrelation TDEP FAL NRC and NID thread depth finishing allowance number of cuts The programmed finishing allowance acts paraxially and is subtracted from the specified thread depth TDEP the remainder is divided into roughing cuts The cycle will calculate the individual infeed depth automatically depending on t
191. he VARI parameter See also Section Undercut forms E and F to DIN CYCLE94 Page 161 The cycle will find the starting point determined by the tool point direction of the active tool and the thread diameter automatically The position of this starting point referred to the programmed coordinate values is determined by the tool point direction of the active tool For the forms A and B the undercut angle of the active tool is monitored in the cycle If it is detected that the form of the undercut cannot be machined using the selected tool the message Changed form of undercut will be displayed on the control system the machining however is continued Note Before calling the cycle a tool compensation must be activated otherwise the cycle is terminated and the error message 61000 No tool compensation active is issued Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 179 Programming example Thread undercut form A This program can be used to program a thread undercut of form A N10 D3 TL S300 M3 G95 FO 3 Specification of technology values N20 GO G90 2100 X50 Selection of starting position N30 CYCLE96 42 60 A Cycle call N40 G90 GO X100 2100 Approach next position N50 M2 End of program 9 5 7 Thread chaining CYCLE98 Programming CYCLE98 PO1 DM1 PO2 DM2 PO3 DM3 PO4 DM4 APP ROP TDEP FAL IANG NSP NRC NID PP1 PP2 PP3 VARI NUMTH _VRT Parameters DM3 APP
192. he VARI parameter When the thread depth is divided into infeeds with constant cutting cross section the cutting force will remain constant over all roughing cuts In this case the infeed will be performed using different values for the infeed depth Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 187 A second version is the distribution of the whole thread depth to constant infeed depths When doing so the cutting cross section becomes larger from cut to cut but with smaller values for the thread depth this technology can result in better cutting conditions The finishing allowance FAL is removed after roughing in one step Then the idle passes programmed under parameter NID are executed IANG infeed angle IANG lt 2 By using parameter IANG the angle is defined under which the infeed is carried out in the thread If you wish to infeed at a right angle to the cutting direction in the thread the value of this parameter must be set to zero If you wish to infeed along the flanks the absolute value of this parameter may amount maximally to the half of the flank angle of the tool The execution of the infeed is defined by the sign of this parameter With a positive value infeed is always carried out along the rear flank and with a negative value infeed is always carried out along the front flank If the value of IANG for tapered threads is nonetheless negative the cycle will carry out a flank infeed
193. he desired program control option see table below for detailed softkey functions The softkeys selected are highlighted in blue Disables the output of setpoints to axes and spindles The setpoint display simulates the traverse movements It functions the same as pressing the following key PROGRAM TEST After activating this option the icon PRT appears immediately in the program status bar and this softkey is highlighted in blue For more information of the program test refer to Section Program test Page 38 All traversing motions are performed with the feedrate setpoint specified via the Dry run feed setting data Instead of the programmed motion commands the dry run feed rate is effective After activating this option the icon DRY appears immediately in the program status bar and this softkey is highlighted in blue Stops processing of the program at every block in which miscellaneous function M01 is programmed It functions the same as pressing the following key M01 After activating this option the icon M01 appears immediately in the program status bar and this softkey is highlighted in blue Skips program blocks that are identified with a slash in front of the block number e g N100 After activating this option the icon SKP appears immediately in the program status bar and this softkey is highlighted in blue Available only in the following state Each block is decoded separately and a stop
194. he following functions exist e Programmable rotation ROT AROT and e programmable mirroring MIRROR AMIRROR These functions are primarily used in milling Examples of rotation and mirroring see Section List of instructions Page 233 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 61 8 2 7 Workpiece clamping settable work offset G54 to G59 G500 G53 G153 Functionality The adjustable work offset specifies the position of the workpiece zero on the machine offset of the workpiece zero with respect to the machine Zero point This offset is determined upon clamping of the workpiece into the machine and must be entered in the corresponding data field by the operator The value is activated by the program by selection from six possible groupings G54 to G59 Programming G54 to G59 1 to 6th settable work offset G500 Settable work offset OFF modal G53 settable work offset OFF non modal also suppresses programmable offset G153 As with G53 additionally suppresses base frame See the following illustration for settable work offset Workpiece Specify offset in the Z axis only Programming example N10 G54 GO X50 Z135 N20 X70 Z160 N30 T1 D1 N40 M3 S1000 N50 GO X20 Z130 N60 G01 Z150 F0 12 N70 X50 FO 1 N80 G500 X100 Z170 N90 M30 8 2 8 Kinematic transformation 8 2 8 1 Milling on turned parts TRANSMIT Function The TRANSMIT function enables the following e Face machin
195. he outward movement at rapid traverse until the retraction plane is reached Sequence Position reached prior to cycle start The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane The cycle creates the following sequence of motions e Approach of the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance by using GO e Traversing to final drilling depth with G1 and the feedrate programmed prior to the cycle call e Dwell time at final drilling depth e Spindle and program stop with M5 MO After program stop press the following key e Retraction to the retraction plane with GO Explanation of the parameters For an explanation of the parameters RTP RFP SDIS DP and DPR refer to Section Drilling centering CYCLE81 Pace T27p Programming and Operating Manual Turning 148 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 See the following parameters for CYCLE88 M5 MO G4 GO G1 DTB dwell time The dwell time to the final drilling depth chip breakage is programmed under DTB in seconds SDIR direction of rotation The programmed direction of rotation is active for the distance to be traversed to the final drilling depth If values other than 3 or 4 M3 M4 are generated alarm 61102 No spindle direction programmed is generated and the cycle is aborted Programming example Fourth boring pass CYCLE88 is called at XO The drilling axis is the Z axis The safety clearance is programmed with 3 mm the final drill
196. here PLC tags are to be written in rapid succession one element will be required per write operation If more write operations are to be executed than there are elements available then block transfer will be required a preprocessing stop may need to be triggered Example SA_DBB 1 1 A DBB 2 2 A _DBB 3 3 STOPRE SA DBB 4 4 8 15 Program jumps 8 15 1 Unconditional program jumps Functionality NC programs process their blocks in the sequence in which they were arranged when they were written The processing sequence can be changed by introducing program jumps The jump destination can be a block with a label or with a block number This block must be located within the program The unconditional jump instruction requires a separate block Programming GOTOF label Jump forward in the direction of the last block of the program GOTOB label Jump backwards in the direction of the first block of the program Label Selected string for the label jump label or block number See the following illustration for an example of unconditional jumps Program execution a S N20 GOTOF LABELO jumps to label LABELO N10 GOX TZ N50 LABELO R1 R2 R3 N51 GOTOF LABEL1 jumps to label LABEL1 sd C LABEL2 X Z N100 M2 End of program LABEL1 X Z C N150 GOTOB LABEL2 jumps to label LABEL2 8 15 2 Conditional program jumps Functionality Jump conditions are formulated after the IF instruction If th
197. hics window The contour chain which displays the start point and programmed contour elements The current position in the chain is color highlighted The graphics window which displays the progress of the contour as you configure the parameters for the contour elements 221 All parad The following additional parameters are displayed after you press this softkey neters e Length of the straight line Pitch angle with reference to X axis Parameters for programming circular arcs ae 10 80 49 IEE 2012 12 15 Circular arc Alter native abs O abs O abs O abs O Trans to next element CHR O 6 6868 All para Free text input meters Contour allowance 6 606 Right O elles oe ZOOM Ss Direction of rotation of the circular arc clockwise or Absolute abs incremental inc positions of circle counter clockwise center point in X I and Z K directions Radius of circle The contour chain which displays the start point and programmed contour elements The current position in the chain is color highlighted Absolute abs incremental inc end positions in Xand The graphics window which displays the progress of the Z directions contour as you configure the parameters for the contour elements All parad The following additional parameters are displayed after you press this softkey neters Starting angle with reference to X axis Angle to preceding element tangential trans
198. ibuted equally with the maximum possible value When grooving at oblique faces the tool will traverse from one groove to the next on the shortest path that is parallel to the cone at which the groove is machined During this process a safety clearance to the contour is calculated internally in the cycle Programming and Operating Manual Turning 154 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 1 Step Paraxial roughing down to the base of the groove in single infeed steps After each infeed the tool is retracted for chip breaking 2 Step The groove is machined vertically to the infeed direction in one or several steps whereby each step in turn is divided according to the infeed depth From the second cut along the groove width onwards the tool will retract by 1 mm before each retraction 1 1 1 I L r Li 1 1 4 i 1 I I i i I I od 1 l a 1 I T Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 155 3 Step Machining of the flanks in one step if angles are programmed under ANG1 or ANG2 Infeed along the groove width is carried out in several steps if the flank width is larger 4 Step Stock removal of the finishing allowance parallel to the contour from the edge to the groove center During this operation the tool radius compensation is selected and deselected by the cycle automatically Explanation of parameters SPD and SPL starting point These coordinates can be us
199. illing depth has been reached Note It is possible to stop the active spindle with orientation The angular value is programmed using a transfer parameter Cycle CYCLE86 can be used if the spindle to be used for the boring operation is technically able to go into position controlled spindle operation Programming example Second boring pass CYCLE86 will be used to drill on the end face in the X Y plane at position X20 Y20 The drilling axis is the Z axis The final drilling depth is programmed as an absolute value no safety clearance is specified The dwell time at the final drilling depth is 2 s The top edge of the workpiece is positioned at Z10 In the cycle the spindle is to rotate with M3 and to stop at 45 degrees Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 145 See the following example of second boring N10 GO G90 X0 2100 SPOS 0 Approach start position N15 SETMS 2 Master spindle is now the milling spindle N20 TRANSMIT Activate TRANSMIT function N35 T10 D1 Load tool N50 G17 GO G90 X20 Y20 Drilling position N60 S800 M3 F500 N70 CYCLE86 112 110 77 Oy 2 Sy 1 0 1 Cycle call with absolute drilling depth 45 N80 GO Z100 N90 TRAFOOF Switch off TRANSMIT N95 SETMS Master spindle is now the main spindle again N200 M2 End of program 9 4 10 Boring with stop 1 CYCLE87 Programming CYCLE87 RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR SDIR Parameters Data type REAL Retract
200. imum of 300 part programs which include those created by the control system for certain functions such as MM TSM and so on Softkey functions Pressing this key on the PPU allows you to open the following window PROGRAM MANAGER WA 5 S X 735513249 Nane Type Length Date Tine ren 9 New Search A Hark rn 62 E Paste Undo NC MPF Free 1 25 MB CINPUT key to open file DEL pege key to delete file D gt me E O 0 O Stores the NC programs for subsequent operations Executes the selected file No editing is allowed in the execution process Manages and transfers the manufacturer cycles Creates new files or directories Reads in out files via the USB drive and executes the Searches for files program from the external storage media Reads in out files via the RS232 interface and Selects all files for the subsequent operations executes the program from an external PC PG 6 Reads in out files via the Ethernet interface and Copies the selected file s to the clipboard executes the program from an external PC PG Backs up manufacturer files Pastes the selected file s from the clipboard to the current directory Backs up user files Restores the deleted file s Shows the recently accessed files Opens the second level softkeys for example Renane Programming and Operating Manual Turning 28 6FC5398 5DP 10 0BA1 08 2013 4 1 Creating a part program Operating sequence T
201. in two steps Thus the minimum drilling depth is not smaller than DAM 2 Note The direction of rotation when tapping in the cycle is always reversed automatically Programming example 1 Rigid tapping A thread is tapped without compensating chuck at position X30 Y35 in the XY plane the tapping axis is the Z axis No dwell time is programmed the depth is programmed as a relative value The parameters for the direction of rotation and for the lead must be assigned values A metric thread M5 is tapped Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 137 N10 GO G90 T11 D1 Specification of technology values N20 G17 X30 Y35 240 Approach drilling position N30 CYCLE84 40 36 2 30 3 5 90 200 500 3 O Cycle call parameter PIT has been 0 0 0 00000 omitted no value is entered for the absolute depth or the dwell time spindle stop at 90 degrees speed for tapping is 200 speed for retraction is 500 N40 M02 End of program Programming example 2 Proceed through the following steps E 1 Select the desired operating area Open the vertical softkey bar for available drilling cycles yy Drill 3 Press this softkey to open the lower level softkey bar Thread Rigid 4 Press this softkey to open the window for CYCLE84 Parameterize the cycle as desired tapping a EA N MPF 1 MPF 6 66666 SDIS 2 00000 DP 18 66060 DPR 6 66660 DTB 6 56666 SDAC 3 QO MPIT 12 00
202. ing depth is specified relative to the reference plane M4 is active in the cycle N10 G17 G54 G90 F1 S450 M3 T1 Specification of technology values N20 GO X0 210 Approach drilling position N30 CYCLE88 5 2 3 72 3 4 Cycle call with programmed direction of rotation of spindle M4 N40 M2 End of program 9 4 12 Reaming 2 CYCLE89 Programming CYCLE89 RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR DTB Parameters Data type an REAL Retraction plane absolute REAL Reference plane absolute SDIS REAL Safety clearance enter without sign DP REAL Final drilling depth absolute D REAL Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane enter without sign REAL Dwell time at final drilling depth chip breakage Function The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate to the entered final drilling depth When the final drilling depth is reached a dwell time can be programmed Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 149 Sequence Position reached prior to cycle start The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane The cycle creates the following sequence of motions e Approach of the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance by using GO e Traversing to final drilling depth with G1 and the feedrate programmed prior to the cycle call e Dwell time to final drilling depth e Retraction up to the reference plane brought forward by the safety cl
203. ing on turned parts in the turning clamp drill holes contours e Acartesian coordinate system can be used to program these machining operations Programming and Operating Manual Turning 62 6FC5398 5DP 10 0BA1 08 2013 e The controller maps the programmed traversing movements of the Cartesian coordinate system onto the traversing movements of real machine axes standard situation Rotary axis The main spindle functions here as the machine rotary axis Infeed axis perpendicular to rotary axis Longitudinal axis parallel to rotary axis The linear axes are positioned perpendicular to one another e A tool center offset relative to the turning center is permitted e The velocity control makes allowance for the limits defined for the rotations e In addition to the tool length compensation it is also possible to work with the tool radius compensation G41 G42 TRANSMIT transformation type TRANSMIT in the standard case with TRAFO_TYPE_n 256 Syntax TRANSMIT TRAFOOF Rotary axis The rotary axis cannot be programmed as it is occupied by a geometry axis and thus cannot be programmed directly as channel axis Meaning TRANSMIT Activates the first declared TRANSMIT function This function is also designated as polar transformation TRAFOOF Deactivates an active transformation OFFN Offset contour normal Distance of the face machining from the programmed reference contour Note An active TRANSMIT transforma
204. ing the SINMUIAION ss ciccnsdadaneceseacncanadesadesndcostasssecncadicanseantencdeaneemsdiatnsdeesdscensnandcansesetesnctaGbesdenedicaeeeenads 5 2 POOF alia COMMU GN oe E Aid ian teatieaurhi ie iaaeidamiendi E E 5 3 E EEEE oe EEEE PEE T A EEEE E E AE EEE E E AE TE 5 4 Starting and stopping interrupting a Part PFOGFAM ccccccccseccceeececeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeceseucesseesseeesseeeeseneesans 5 5 Executing transferring a part program from external ccccccseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeesseeeeesaeeeeesaeeeesaaes 5 5 1 Executing transferring through the RS232 interface ceccccceceeccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeseeseesaaeeeeseeeeesaees 5 5 1 1 Configuring RS232 communication vicvvec sacacssscicnedtdanssanevacesesdeandoanexsce saves saiaandbedesticencdiesunssebdbessadaaedasdsnsbee ones 5 5 1 2 Executing from external through RS232 interface ccc eeccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesseeeeeseeeeeeseeseesaeeeeesaeeeeeas 41 5 5 1 3 Transferring from external through RS232 interface cccccececccccseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeeas D52 Executing transferring through the Ethernet connection cccccseeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeseeeesaees 5 5 2 1 Configuring the Ethernet connection ccccccescecceescecceeseecceseccsseecseueeeceuceeseaseeesauseessueeeeseueeessaneeesaaeees 5 5 2 2 Executing from external through Ethernet CONNECTION cceecceeeee
205. inger rule of the right hand The coordinate system is related to the workpiece and programming takes place independently of whether the tool or the workpiece is being traversed When programming it is always assumed that the tool traverses relative to the coordinate system of the workpiece which is intended to be stationary The figure below illustrates how to determine the axis directions Machine coordinate system MCS The orientation of the coordinate system relative to the machine depends on the machine type It can be rotated in different positions The directions of the axes follow the 3 finger rule of the right hand Seen from the front of the machine the middle finger of the right hand points in the opposite direction to the infeed of the spindle Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 15 The figure below shows an example of the machine coordinate system of a turning machine The origin of this coordinate system is the machine zero This point is only a reference point which is defined by the machine manufacturer It does not have to be approachable The traversing range of the machine axes can be in the negative range Workpiece coordinate system WCS To describe the geometry of a workpiece in the workpiece program a right handed right angled coordinate system is also used The workpiece zero can be freely selected by the programmer in the Z axis In the X axis it lies in th
206. ion plane absolute eo o REAL Reference plane absolute SDIS REAL Safety clearance enter without sign p s REAL Final drilling depth absolute DPR REL o Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane enter without sign SDIR Direction of rotation Values 3 for M3 4 for M4 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 146 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Function The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate to the entered final drilling depth During boring 3 a spindle stop without orientation M5 is generated after reaching the final drilling depth followed by a programmed stop MO Pressing the following key continues the retraction movement at rapid traverse until the retraction plane is reached Sequence Position reached prior to cycle start The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane The cycle creates the following sequence of motions e Approach of the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance by using GO e Traversing to final drilling depth with G1 and the feedrate programmed prior to the cycle call e Spindle stop with M5 e Press the following key e Retraction to the retraction plane with GO Explanation of the parameters For an explanation of the parameters RTP RFP SDIS DP and DPR refer to Section Drilling centering CYCLE81 Page 127 See the following parameters for CYCLE87 Vv VY M5 MO G0 G1 SDIR direction of
207. is e G18 Length 1 in X axis length 2 in Z axis e G19 Length 1 in Z axis length 2 in Y axis With SD 42940 TOOL_LENGTH_CONST 18 the length assignment is performed in all planes G17 to G19 as for G18 e Length 1 in X axis length 2 in Z axis Setting data in the program In addition to setting of setting data via operator input these can also be written in the program Programming example N10 MC TOOL LENGTH TYPE 2 N20 MC TOOL LENGTH CONST 18 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 108 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 8 12 Miscellaneous function M Functionality The miscellaneous function M initiates switching operations such as Coolant ON OFF and other functions A small part of M functions have already been assigned a fixed functionality by the CNC manufacturer The functions not yet assigned fixed functions are reserved for free use of the machine manufacturer Programming M Max 5 M functions per block Effect Activation in blocks with axis movements If the functions MO M1 M2 are contained in a block with traversing movements of the axes these M functions become effective after the traversing movements The functions M3 M4 M5 are output to the internal interface PLC before the traversing movements The axis movements only begin once the controlled spindle has ramped up for M3 M4 For M5 however the spindle standstill is not waited for The axis movements already begin before the spindle stops defau
208. ith additional linear axis and groove wall offset transformation type 514 On a machine with a second linear axis this transformation variant makes use of redundancy in order to perform improved tool compensation The following conditions then apply to the second linear axis e A smaller working area e The second linear axis should not be used for traversing the part program Certain machine data settings are assumed for the part program and the assignment of the corresponding axes in the BCS or MCS For more information refer to SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Function Manual Offset contour normal OFFN transformation type 513 To mill grooves with TRACYL the following is programmed e Groove center line in the part program e Half the groove width programmed using OFFN To avoid damage to the groove side OFFN acts only when the tool radius compensation is active Furthermore OFFN should also be gt the tool radius to avoid damage occurring to the opposite side of the groove A part program for milling a groove generally comprises the following steps 1 Selecting a tool Programming and Operating Manual Turning 70 6FC5398 5DP 10 0BA1 08 2013 Select TRACYL Select suitable coordinate offset frame Positioning Program OFFN Select TRC Approach block position TRC and approach groove side Oo Oe ST ge oS ON Groove center line contour 9 Deselect TRC 10 Retraction block retract TRC and move away from
209. ition a2 0 End angle with reference to X axis ce Angle of aperture of circle Machine manufacturer The names of the identifiers X or Z are defined in the machine data where they can also be changed Transition to next element A transition element can be used whenever there is a point of intersection between two neighboring elements this can be calculated from the input values You can choose to insert either a radius RND a chamfer CHR or an undercut as the transition element between any two contour elements The transition is always appended to the end of a contour element You select transition elements in the parameter input screen for the relevant contour element Programming and Operating Manual Turning 222 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 You can access the undercut transition element see Section Undercuts for turning technology Page 224 with the following softkey Alter native Radius or chamfer at the start or the end of a turning contour In simple turning contours a chamfer or radius must often be appended at the start and end of the contour A chamfer or radius terminates an axis parallel contour section on the blank You select the direction of transition for the contour start in the starting point screen You can choose between chamfer and radius The value is defined in the same manner as for the transition elements In addition four directions can be selected in a single selectio
210. ition probe did not switch 1 Probe switched Timer for runtime 0 0 10 300 System variable AN_SETUP_TIME min value read Time since the control system AN_POWERON_TIM only has last booted E Time since the control system N10 IF AC_CYCLE_TIME 50 Daa AC_OPERATING_TI MIN value read has last booted normally ME only Total runtime of all NC programs AC_CYCLE_TIME Runtime of the NC program only AC_CUTTING_TIME of the selected program Tool action time Workpiece counter 0 999 999 999 System variable AC_TOTAL_PARTS _ integer Total actual count AC_REQUIRED Set number of workpiece _PARTS AC_ACTUAL_PARTS Current actual count AC_SPECIAL_PART Count of workpieces specified S by the user AC_ Number of active read only MSNUM spindles P_ Number of read only MSNUM programmed spindles N10 IF AC_ACTUAL_PARTS Tk P_NUM_ Number of configured read only SPINDLES spindles AA_S n Actual speed of spindle Spindle number n 1 n read only Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 243 Address Significance Value Information Programming assignments P_S n Last programmed Spindle number n 1 speed of spindle n read only AC_ Current direction of Spindle number n 1 a rotation of spindle n read only Last programmed Spindle number n 1 ce direction of rotation of spindle n P_ Number of the active read only N10 IF P_TOOLNO TOOLNO tool T GOTOF P_TOOL
211. lank plastic sheet 3 Detach the insertion strips from the blank plastic sheet 4 Pull out the pre inserted strips from the MCP 5 Insert the customized strips on the back of the MCP Note This manual assumes an 808D standard machine control panel MCP Should you use a different MCP the operation may be other than described herein 1 3 Screen layout M 2 M 15 52 19 Ao 201370672 NC MPF 541 MPF SIEMENS amp w Reset function function Axis Application area Bey Status area Tine counter Act val REL Act val Work WCS Tip ActYa Prog Block A Real Corr and softkey area ee e ese tins BP Prog Alarms and messages Alarm and message area ae P4 Standard machine data loaded 66666161H HHHHHHAZH M reton RE Jue A E ee T erect SIEMENS B Reset ROY TE mega channel 1 axis Z refer Displays active alarms with alarm text een HARE The alarm number is displayed in white lettering on a red background The associated alarm text is shown in red lettering An arrow indicates that several alarms are active The number to the right of the arrow indicates the total number of active alarms When more than one alarm is active the display scrolls through the alarms in sequence An acknowledgement symbol indicates the alarm cancel criterion Displays messages from NC programs READY TO START Messages from NC programs do not have numbers and appear in green lettering Programming and Ope
212. lates any missing parameters for you as soon as they can be obtained from other parameters You can link together contour elements and transfer to the edited part program Technology The contour calculator for turning technology provides the following functions for this purpose e Toggling between radius diameter programming DIAMON DIAMOF DIAM90 e Chamfer radius at the start and end of the contour e Undercuts as transition elements between two axially parallel straight lines where one runs horizontally and the other vertically Form E Form F thread undercut acc to DIN general undercut Contour editor FKE Proceed through the following steps to open the contour editor window E 1 Select the desired operating area MANAGER 2 Enter the desired program folder 3 Select a program file and press this key to open it in the program editor 4 Press this softkey to open the contour editor window Cont Defining a starting point Pag Programming example turning Initially you define a contour starting point see Section The contour is then programmed step by step see Section Page 227 Softkey functions Ww 11 13 12 muu 2012712713 N MPFATEST MPF Start point Alter native Spec for facing axis Start point x 8 068 abs Z 6 606 abs Approach start pt GA O Trans to next element ay a O Free text input Cancel
213. layed in the following window Tool measurement manual T T D 1 o Maraga nn Radius T3 000 nno Length XL _ H 666 mn Save the length value in the X axis The tool diameter radius and cutting edge position are all taken in to account Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 23 10 Press this softkey and you can see that the compensation data values have been automatically Tool list added to the tool data Measuring the tool in the Z direction 1 Select the desired operating area ES MACHINE AM 2 Switch to JOG mode UL JOG neqes 3 Open the manual tool measurement window D tool 4 Press this vertical softkey to measure the tool in the Z direction Heasure Z 5 Move the tool to approach the workpiece in the Z direction t x lt 6 Switch to handwheel control mode J E HAND T Select a suitable override feedrate and then use the handwheel to move the tool to scratch the required workpiece edge or the edge of the setting block if it is used 8 Enter the distance between the tool tip and the workpiece edge in the ZO field for example 0 This value is the thickness of a setting block if it is used Tool measurement manual ad 8 al i 3 x T 1 D 1 ZA al om Length ZL H HHH mm Note For a milling tool with edge position 6 or 8 the radius of the tool itself is displayed in the following window Z T 5 D 1 za Ma
214. le controller signal A section can be skipped by several blocks in succession using If a block must be skipped during program execution all program blocks marked with are not executed All instructions contained in the blocks concerned will not be considered The program is continued with the next block without marking Comment remark The instructions in the blocks of a program can be explained using comments remarks A comment always starts with a semicolon and ends with end of block Comments are displayed together with the contents of the remaining block in the current block display Messages Messages are programmed in a separate block A message is displayed in a special field and remains active until a block with a new message is executed or until the end of the program is reached Up to 65 characters can be displayed in message texts A message without message text cancels a previous message MSG THIS IS THE MESSAGE TEXT Programming example N10 G amp S company order no 12A71 N20 Pump part 17 drawing no 123 677 N30 Program created by H Adam Dept TV 4 N40 MSG DRAWING NO 123677 50 G54 F4 7 8220 D2 M3 Main block N60 GO G90 X100 2200 N70 Gl Z185 6 N80 X112 N90 X118 Z180 Block can be suppressed N100 X118 2120 N110 GO G90 X200 N120 M2 End of program A 16 List of instructions The functions below marked with an asterisk are active at the start of the program in the
215. le is always approached with both axes simultaneously and in finishing axis by axis In finishing the infeed axis traverses first Programming and Operating Manual Turning 172 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Programming example 1 Stock removal cycle The contour shown in the illustration to explain the defining parameters is to be machined longitudinally externally by complete machining Axis specific finishing allowances are specified Cutting will not be interrupted when roughing The maximum infeed is 5 mm The contour is stored in a separate program P2 87 65 P1 120 37 The following is the main program N10 T1 DL GO G95 S500 M3 2125 X81 N20 CYCLE95 CONTOUR 1 5 1 2 0 6 r 0 5 N30 GO G90 X81 N40 Z125 N50 M2 The following is the subprogram CONTOUR 1 SPF N100 Z120 X37 N110 Z117 X40 N120 Z27112 RND 5 N130 Z95 X65 N140 287 N150 2 7 X29 N160 262 N170 258 X44 N180 252 N190 Z41 X37 N200 235 N210 X76 N220 M02 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Approach position before cycle call Cycle call Reapproach starting position Traverse axis by axis End of program Subroutine for contour turning for example Traverse axis by axis Rounding with radius 5 Traverse axis by axis End of subroutine 173 Programming example 2 Stock removal cycle The stock removal contour is defined in the calling program and is traversed di
216. le speed and the lead Programming and Operating Manual Turning 140 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 The value for the thread lead can be defined either as the thread size for metric threads between M3 and M48 only or as a value distance from one thread turn to the next as a numerical value The parameter not required in each case is omitted in the call or is assigned the value zero If the two lead parameters have conflicting values alarm 61001 Thread lead wrong is generated by the cycle and cycle execution is interrupted Note Depending on the settings in machine data MD30200 MA_NUM_ENCS the cycle selects whether tapping is to be performed with or without encoder The direction of rotation for the spindle must be programmed with M3 or M4 In thread blocks with G63 the values of the feedrate override switch and spindle speed override switch are frozen to 100 A longer compensating chuck is usually required for tapping without encoder AXN tool axis The following figure presents the options for the drilling axes to be selected With G18 e AXN 1 Corresponds to Z e AXN 2 Corresponds to X e AXN 3 Corresponds to Y if Y axis is present See the following illustration for drilling axis of G18 Length compen sation 1st axis of the current plane is X 2nd axis of the current plane is Y 3rd axis of the current plane is Z 1st axis of the current plane is Z 2nd axis of the current plane is X 3rd axis of
217. lements this sequence is repeated for each relief cut E Roughing without relief cut E Roughing of the first relief cut C Roughing of the second relief cut Finishing e The cycle starting point is approached axis by axis with GO e The contour starting point is approached with GO in both axes at the same time e Finishing along the contour with G1 G2 G3 and FF3 e Retraction to the starting point with both axes and GO Explanation of the parameters NPP name This parameter is used to specify the contour name You can define the contour as a subroutine or a section of the called program e Defining the contour as a subroutine NPP name of the subroutine If the subroutine already exists specify a name and then continue If the subroutine does not yet exist specify a name and then press the following softkey Hew File A program with the entered name is created and the program automatically jumps to the contour editor Use the following softkey to confirm your input and return to the screen form for this cycle Tech interface e Defining the contour as a section of the called program NPP name of the starting label name of the end label Input 166 If the contour is not yet described specify the name of the starting label and press the following softkey If the controu is already described name of starting label name of end label directly press the following softkey Attach contour
218. licking this softkey you can display the available o selection options in the graphic display area Select this softkey to make the correct selection green line Confirm your choice with the following softkey v Accept Change a selected dialog EnSage If you want to change an existing dialog selection you must select the contour element in which the selection dialog was originally chosen Both alternatives are displayed again when you select this softkey Clear a parameter input field DETSE You can delete the value in the selected parameter input field with this softkey or the following key value DEL Save a contour element eee If you have entered the available data for a contour element or selected a desired dialog pressing elenent this softkey allows you to store the contour element and return to the main screen You can then SO program the next contour element Append contour element Use the cursor keys to select the element in front of the end marker Use the softkeys to select the contour element of your choice and enter the values you know in the input screen for that element Confirm your inputs with the following softkey Accept element Select contour element Position the cursor on the desired contour element in the contour chain and select it using this key E The parameters for the selected element will then be displayed The name of the element appears at the top of th
219. ll linear axes in the block until revoked by G70 in a following block e Inch dimension as G70 however G700 applies also for feedrate and length related setting data e Metric dimension as G71 however G710 applies also for feedrate and length related setting data Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 55 e Diameter programming DIAMON on e Diameter programming DIAMOF off Diameter programming DIAM90 for traversing blocks with G90 Radius programming for traversing blocks with G91 8 2 2 Absolute incremental dimensioning G90 G91 AC IC Functionality With the instructions G90 G91 the written positional data X Z are evaluated as a coordinate point G90 or as an axis position to traverse to G91 G90 91 applies for all axes Irrespective of G90 G91 certain positional data can be specified for certain blocks in absolute incremental dimensions using ACI IC These instructions do not determine the path by which the end points are reached this is provided by a G group GO G1 G2 and G3 For more information refer to Sections Linear interpolation Page 71 and Circular interpolation Page 73 Programming G90 Absolute dimension data G91 Incremental dimension data Z AC Absolute dimensioning for a certain axis here Z axis non modal Z C Incremental dimensioning for a certain axis here Z axis non modal See the following different dimensioning types in the
220. lock will follow In one block several IF instructions are possible Relational operators equal lt gt not equal gt greater than lt less than gt greater than or equal to less than or equal to Programming and Operating Manual Turning 242 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Address Significance Value Information Programming assignments 99 Upper limit speed of 0 001 Limits the spindle speed with the See G96 the spindle with G96 999 999 G96 function enabled constant G97 cutting rate and G97 Measurement with 1 Measuring input 1 rising N10 MEAS 1 G1 X Z deletion of distance to edge Fis 1 Measuring input1 falling edge Measurement without 1 Measuring input 1 rising N10 MEAW 1 G1 X Z deletion of distance to edge Fi go 1 Measuring input1 falling edge A_DBB n Data byte Reading and writing PLC N10 A_DBR 5 16 3 A_DBW In Data word variables Write Real variables A_DBD n Data double word with offset position 5 A_DBRJn Real data position type and meaning are agreed between NC and PLC Measurement result for Axis dentifier of an axis X Z N10 R1 AA_MM X an axis in the machine traversing when measuring coordinate system Axis dentifier of an axis X Z N10 R2 AA_MW X an axis in the traversing when measuring workpiece coordinate system N10 IF AC_MEAS 1 1 GOTOF Continue program when probe has switched Default condition 0 Default cond
221. lt setting The remaining M functions are output to the PLC with the traversing movements If you would like to program an M function directly before or after an axis movement insert a separate block with this M function Note The M function interrupts the G64 continuous path mode and generates exact stop Programming example N10 51000 N20 G1 X50 F0 1 M3 M function in the block with axis movement spindle accelerates before the X axis movement N180 M78 M67 M10 M12 M37 Max 5 M functions in the block M30 Note In addition to the M and H functions T D and S functions can also be transferred to the PLC Programmable Logic Controller In all a maximum of 10 such function outputs are possible in a block 8 13 H function Functionality With H functions floating point data REAL data type as with arithmetic parameters see Section Arithmetic parameter R Page 110 can be transferred from the program to the PLC The meaning of the values for a given H function is defined by the machine manufacturer Programming HO to H9999 Max 3 H functions per block Programming example N10 H1 1 987 H2 978 123 H3 4 3 H functions in block N20 GO X71 3 H99 8978 234 With axis movements in block N30 H5 Corresponds to H0 5 0 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 109 Note In addition to the M and H functions T D and S functions can also be transferred to PLC Programmable Logic
222. ltiple cutting edges to a specific tool If a special cutting edge is required then it can be programmed using D and the appropriate number If a D word is not written D1 is automatically effective If DO is programmed the offsets for the tool are ineffective Programming D Tool offset number 1 9 DO No offsets active A maximum of 64 data fields D numbers for tool offset blocks can be stored in the control system simultaneously Each tool has its own compensation block a max of nine Information Tool length compensations become effective immediately when the tool is active when no D number was programmed with the values of D1 The compensation is retracted with the first programmed traversing of the associated length compensation axis A tool radius compensation must also be activated by G41 G42 Programming example Tool change N10 T1 Tool 1 is activated with the associated D1 N20 GO X100 The length offset compensation is overlaid here N30 z100 N40 T4 D2 Load tool 4 D2 from T4 is active N50 X50 z750 N60 GO 262 N70 D1 D1 for tool 4 active only cutting edge changed N80 M30 Contents of a compensation memory e Geometrical dimensions Length radius They consist of several components geometry wear The control system takes into account the components to obtain a resulting dimension e g overall length 1 total radius The respective overall dimension becomes active when the offset me
223. m ATN e X 20 inc e CHR 5 1 1223 5 6115 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 2217 s Accept element R A Ny Accept element s Accept Dialog select Accept element element ta Accept element a Accept element s Accept element Hore Close contour 228 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Press this softkey to select a contour element of straight horizontal line Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to confirm Z 25 inc Press this softkey to select a contour element of straight line in any direction Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to confirm e X 10 inc e Z 30 inc Press this softkey to select a contour element of straight horizontal line Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to confirm e Z 8inc e RND 2 Press this softkey to select a contour element of circular arc Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to select the desired contour characteristics e Direction of rotation counter clockwise e R 20 e X 20 inc e Z 20 inc Press this softkey to confirm Press this softkey to select a contour element of straight horizontal line Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to confirm e Z
224. me at final drilling depth The dwell time at final drilling depth can be entered in seconds or revolutions DIS1 programmable limit distance for VARI 1 The limit distance after re insertion in the hole can be programmed The limit distance is calculated within the cycle as follows e Up to a drilling depth of 30 mm the value is set to 0 6 mm e For larger drilling depths the limit distance is the result of RFP SDIS current depth 50 If this calculated value gt 7 a limit of 7 mm maximum is applied Programming example Deep hole drilling This program executes the cycle CYCLE83 at the position XO The first drill hole is drilled with a dwell time zero and machining type chip breaking The final drilling depth and the first drilling depth are entered as absolute values The drilling axis is the Z axis N10 GO G54 G90 F5 S500 M4 Specification of technology values N20 D1 T6 Z50 Approach retraction plane N30 G17 XO Approach drilling position N40 CYCLE83 3 3 0 0 80 0 10 0 0 0 O 1 0 Call of cycle depth parameters with absolute values N50 M2 End of program 9 4 6 Rigid tapping CYCLE84 Programming CYCLE84 RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR DTB SDAC MPIT PIT POSS SST SST1 AXN 0 0 VARI DAM VRT Parameters Safety clearance enter without sign DP REAL Finalrillingdepth absolute o DPR REAL Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane enter without sign C E e i vos of rotation af
225. meters such as feedrates tool offsets and settable work offsets are not affected by G70 G71 G700 G710 however also affects the feedrate F inch min inch rev or mm min mm rev 8 2 4 Radius diameter dimensions DIAMOF DIAMON DIAM90 Functionality For machining parts the positional data for the X axis transverse axis is programmed as diameter dimensioning When necessary it is possible to switch to radius dimensioning in the program DIAMOF or DIAMON assesses the end point specification for the X axis as radius or diameter dimensioning The actual value appears in the display accordingly for the workpiece coordinate system For DIAM90 irrespective of the traversing method G90 G91 the actual value of the transverse axis is always displayed as a diameter This also applies to reading of actual values in the workpiece coordinate system with MEAS MEAW P_EP x and AA_IW x Programming DIAMOF Radius dimensioning DIAMON Diameter dimensioning DIAM90 diameter dimensioning for G90 radius dimensioning for G91 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 57 See the following diameter and radius dimensioning for the traverse axis Diameter dimensions X Radius dimensioning DIAMON Transverse axis DIAMOF Transverse axis Longitudinal axis Programming example N10 GO XO ZO Approach Starting point N20 DIAMOF Diameter input off N30 Gl X30 S2000 M03 F0 8 X axis traverse axis a
226. ming and Operating Manual Turning 104 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Starting the compensation The tool approaches the contour on a straight line and positions itself vertically to the path tangent in the starting point of the contour Select the start point so as to ensure collision free traversing See the following illustration for start of the tool radius compensation with the example G42 Starting contour Straight Starting contour Circle Compensated PO starting point Tool path Circle radius R cutting edge radius P1 starting point of the contour The tool tip goes around the left of the workpiece when the tool runs clockwise using G41 The tool tip goes around the right of the workpiece when the tool runs counter clockwise using G42 Information As a rule the block with G41 G42 is followed by the block with the workpiece contour However the contour description may be interrupted by an intervening block that does not contain information for the contour path e g only M command Programming example N10 T4 D1 M3 S1000 FO 15 N20 GO XO ZO PO starting point N30 Gl G42 X50 Z50 Selection right of contour P1 N40 XO ZO G40 Gl Starting contour circle or straight line N50 M30 8 11 5 Corner behavior G450 G451 Functionality Using the functions 6450 and G451 you can set the behavior for non continuous transition from one contour element to another contour element corner behavior when G41 G42 is
227. mmunication Communication tool SinuComPCIN To enable the RS232 communication between a SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED and a PC PG you must have the RS232 communication tool SinuComPCIN installed on your PC PG This tool is available in the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Toolbox RS232 communication settings Proceed as follows to configure the communication settings for the RS232 interface 1 Connect the control system with the PC PG using an RS232 cable 2 Select the desired operating area on the PPU PROGRAM MANAGER Programming and Operating Manual Turning 40 6FC5398 5DP 10 0BA1 08 2013 3 Press this softkey to go to the RS232 directory RS232 4 Press this softkey to open the window for RS232 communication settings Settings 5 Use this key to set the values in the following window as required Communications settings Device Baud rate Stop bits Parity Data bits End of transmis Confirm overwrite 6 Press this softkey to save your settings If desired you can press the following softkey to reset the Save settings to defaults Default settings amp T Return to the RS232 main screen Back 8 Open the SinuComPCIN on your PC PG oc 9 Press this button on the main screen and then select the desired baudrate from the list Note that this baudrate must be the same as that you have selected on the NC side z 10 Save the settings with this button ave ae 11 Return to the main screen of SinuCom
228. mory is activated The way in which these values are computed in the axes is determined by the tool type and the current plane G17 G18 G19 e Tool type The tool type drill or turning tool determines which geometry data are required and how they will be calculated e Cutting edge position For the turning tool tool type you must also enter the cutting edge position Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 101 The following figures provide information on the required tool parameters for the respective tool type Turning tool X F toolholder reference point Z Length 1 X Effect G18 Length 1 in X cutting edge Length 2 in Z F toolholder reference point Two compensation blocks required D1 Length 1 D2 Length 1 e g D1 cutting edge 1 X D2 cutting edge 2 a Length 2 ee G18 Length 1 in X Tool tip P Z ool tip i ae Length 2 in Z Cutting edge 1 D1 gt Cutting edge 2 D2 Length 2 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 102 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 See the following illustration for compensations for turning tool with tool radius compensation Turning tool X Tool tip P cutting edge R radius of cutting edge tool radius S position of cutting edge center point F toolholder reference point Note The values Length 1 Length 2 refer to Point P in the cutting edge position 1 8 See the following illustration for effect
229. n field You select the direction of the transition element for the contour end in the end screen This selection is always proposed even if preceding elements were assigned no transition Contour chain Once you complete or cancel the programming of a contour element you can navigate around the contour chain left on the main screen using the cursor keys The current position in the chain is color highlighted The elements of the contour and pole if applicable are displayed in the sequence in which they were programmed You can select an existing contour element with the following key and reassign its parameters A new contour element is inserted after the cursor when you select one of the contour elements on the vertical softkey bar the input focus is then switched to the parameter input on the right of the graphic display Programming always continues after the element selected in the contour chain You can delete the selected element from the chain by selecting the following softkey Delete element Graphics window The graphics window displays the progress of the contour chain as you configure the parameters for the contour elements The element you have selected is displayed in black in the graphics window The contour is displayed to the extent it can be interpreted by the control on the basis of parameter inputs If the contour is still not displayed in the programming graphic further values must be entered Check the contou
230. ng Manual Turning 120 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Counters e AC_ REQUIRED PARTS Number of workpieces required workpiece setpoint In this counter you can define the number of workpieces at which the actual workpiece counter AC_ACTUAL_PARTS is reset to zero The generation of the display alarm 21800 Workpiece setpoint reached can be activated via machine data e AC_TOTAL_PARTS Total number of workpieces produced total actual The counter specifies the total number of all workpieces produced since the start time The counter is set to zero upon every booting of the control system automatically e AC_ACTUAL_PARTS Number of actual workpieces actual This counter registers the number of all workpieces produced since the starting time When the workpiece setpoint is reached AC_REQUIRED_PARTS value greater than zero the counter is automatically zeroed e AC_SPECIAL_PARTS Number of workpieces specified by the user This counter allows users to make a workpiece counting in accordance with their own definition Alarm output can be defined for the case of identity with AC_REQUIRED_PARTS workpiece target Users must reset the counter themselves Programming example N10 IF SAC TOTAL PARTS R15 GOTOF SIST Count reached GO X50 z750 N80 SIST G0 X60 260 N90 MSG Workpiece setpoint reached N100 MO M30 Display The content of the active system variables is visible on the window opened through the following key
231. ng Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 49 4 Select the program file you desire to transfer 5 Press this softkey to copy the file to the buffer memory on the control system py 6 Enter the program directory 7 Press this softkey to paste the copied file into the program directory Paste 5 6 Machining at a specific point Functionality The block search function provides advance of the program to the required block in the part program You can start machining from a specified program block after stopping interrupting the program execution or during remachining Operating sequence M 1 Select the desired operating area i MACHINE gt AUTO 2 Switch to AUTO mode Block 3 Press this softkey to open the block search window a search Al 4 Search for the required starting point with cursor keys or the following softkey Search v If the part program is stopped interrupted in the last machining operation you can press the following softkey to load the interruption point as required Interr point 5 Press one of the following softkeys to set the condition for the block search After the block search the program will continue from the line before the FP ahEGUE interruption point The same calculations of the basic conditions for example Te tool and cutting edge numbers M functions feedrate and spindle speed are carried out as during normal program operation but the axes do not move To
232. ng chuck e without encoder e with encoder Sequence Tapping with compensating chuck without encoder Position reached prior to cycle start The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane The cycle creates the sequence of motions below e Approach of the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance by using GO e Tapping to the final drilling depth e Dwell time at tapping depth parameter DTB e Retraction to the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance e Retraction to the retraction plane with GO See the following parameters for CYCLE840 without encoder RFP SDIS DP RFP DPR G4 G63 G0 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 139 Sequence Tapping with compensating chuck with encoder Position reached prior to cycle start The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane The cycle creates the sequence of motions below e Approach of the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance by using GO e Tapping to the final drilling depth e Dwell time at thread depth parameter DTB e Retraction to the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance e Retraction to the retraction plane with GO See the following parameters for CYCLE840 with encoder RFP SDIS DP RFP DPR G4 G33 G0 Explanation of the parameters For an explanation of the parameters RTP RFP SDIS DP and DPR refer to the t
233. ng the 99 One possibility of defining a circle when using G2 G3 circle greater than semicircle N10 G91 X10 Z AC 20 X incremental dimension Z absolute dimension N10 ACC X 80 for the X axis 80 N20 ACC S 50 for the spindle 50 N10 A ACP 45 3 approach absolute position of the A axis in the positive direction N20 SPOS ACP 33 1 position spindle N10 A ACN 45 3 approach absolute position of the A axis in the negative direction N20 SPOS ACN 33 1 position spindle N10 G1 X Z N11 X ANG or contour over several blocks N10 G1 X Z N11 ANG N12 X Z ANG See G2 G3 N10 CALL VARNAME variable name See G2 G3 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Address Significance Value Information Programming assignments CYCLE Machining cycle Only specified The call of the machining cycles values requires a separate block the appropriate transfer parameters must be loaded with values Special cycle calls are also possible with an additional MCALL or CALL CYCLE81 N5 RTP 110 RFP 100 Assign with values N10 CYCLE81 RTP RFP separate part program block N5 RTP 110 RFP 100 assign with values N10 CYCLE82 RTP RFP separate block N10 CYCLE83 110 100 or transfer values directly separate block N10 CYCLE84 separate block N10 CYCLE840 separate block
234. ngs window where you can set JOG feedrate and variable increment values For detailed information refer to Section Setting the JOG data Page 207 Displays the axis feedrate in the selected coordinate system Displays the axis position data in the relative coordinate system Displays the axis position data in the workpiece coordinate system Displays the axis position data in the machine coordinate system Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 205 Parameters in the JOG window Position Repos offset Ba o BBO O BOB Displays the axes that exist in the machine coordinate system MCS workpiece coordinate system WCS or relative coordinate system REL If you traverse an axis in the positive or negative direction a plus or minus sign appears in the relevant field If the axis is already in the required position no sign is displayed Displays the current position of the axes in the selected coordinate system Displays the distance traversed by each axis in JOG mode from the interruption point in the condition of program interruption For detailed information about program interruption refer to Section Starting and stopping interrupting a part program Page 40 4 Displays the currently active tool number T with the current cutting edge number D Displays the actual axis feedrate and the setpoint mm min or mm rev Displays the actual valu
235. ning cycles CYCLEQ2 Cut off CYCLEQ3 Recess CYCLE94 Undercut DIN form E and F CYCLE9Q5 Stock removal with relief cutting CYCLE96 Thread undercut CYCLE98 Thread chain CYCLE99 Thread cutting 9 2 Programming cycles A standard cycle is defined as a subroutine with name and parameter list Call and return conditions The G functions effective prior to the cycle call and the programmable offsets remain active beyond the cycle The machining plane G17 for drilling cycles or G18 for turning cycles is defined before calling the cycle With drilling cycles the drilling operation is carried out in the axis standing vertically to the current plane Messages output during execution of a cycle During various cycles messages that refer to the state of machining are displayed on the screen of the control system during program execution Programming and Operating Manual Turning 122 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 These messages do not interrupt the program execution and continue to be displayed on the screen until the next message appears The message texts and their meaning are listed together with the cycle to which they refer Block display during execution of a cycle The cycle call is displayed in the current block display for the duration of the cycle Cycle call and parameter list The defining parameters for the cycles can be transferred via the parameter list when the cycle is called Note Cycle calls must always be programm
236. nly when the spindle stops operation LED lit Activates the external chuck to clamp the workpiece inwards LED unlit Activates the internal chuck to clamp the workpiece outwards Pressing this key in any operating mode advances retracts the tailstock LED lit Advances the tailstock towards the workpiece until it firmly engages with the end of the workpiece Pre defined insertion strips The MCP machine control panel package includes two sets six pieces each of pre defined insertion strips One set is for the turning variant of the control system and is pre inserted on the back of the MCP The other set is for the milling variant of the control system If your control system is of the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED milling variant replace the pre inserted strips with the milling specific insertion strips Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 11 Customized insertion strips The MCP package also includes an A4 sized blank plastic sheet with detachable strips You can customize insertion strips if the pre defined strips can not meet your needs In the examples MCP folder of the Toolbox DVD for the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED there is a symbol library file and an insertion strip template file To make customized insertion strips follow the steps below 1 Copy the desired symbols from the symbol library file to the desired locations in the insertion strip template 2 Print the template to the A4 sized b
237. ns to prevent overloading of the rotary axis Avoid selecting TRANSMIT when the tool is positioned exactly on the pole Ensure that the path of the tool center point does not travel through the X0 Y0 pole 8 2 8 2 Cylinder surface transformation TRACYL Functionality e The TRACYL cylinder surface transformation function can be used to machine Longitudinal grooves on cylindrical bodies Transverse grooves on cylindrical objects Grooves with any path on cylindrical bodies The path of the grooves is programmed with reference to the unwrapped level surface of the cylinder e The control system transforms the programmed traversing movements in the Cartesian coordinate X Y Z system into traversing movements of the real machine axes The main spindle functions here as the machine rotary axis e TRACYL must be configured using special machine data The rotary axis position at which the value Y 0 is also defined here e f the machine has a real machine Y axis YM an expanded TRACYL variant can also be configured This allows grooves with groove wall offset to be produced the groove wall and base are perpendicular to each other even if the milling tool s diameter is smaller than the groove width This is otherwise only possible with exact fitting milling cutters Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 65 TRACYL transformation types There are three forms of cylinder surface coordinate trans
238. ntermediate point specification Intermediate point I1 End point Start point Programming example N5 G90 230 X40 Starting point circle for N10 N10 CIP Z250 X40 K1i 40 11 45 End point and intermediate point 8 4 3 Circle with tangential transition CT Functionality With CT and the programmed end point in the current plane G18 Z X plane a circle is produced which tangentially connects to the previous path segment circle or straight line This defines the radius and center point of the circle from the geometric relationships of the previous path section and the programmed circle end point See the following illustration for circle with tangential transition to the previous path section Programming N10 G1 220 F3 Straight line N20 C1 N20 CT X Z Circle with tangential End point of connection the circle X Z 8 5 Thread cutting 8 5 1 Thread cutting with constant lead G33 Functionality The function G33 can be used to machine threads with constant lead of the following type e Thread on cylindrical structures Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Tf e Thread on tapered structures e External thread e Single and multiple start thread e Multi block thread series of threads This requires a spindle with position measuring system G33 remains active until canceled by another instruction from this G group GO G1 G2 G3 See the follo
239. o create a part program follow these steps E 1 Select the desired operating area MANAGER 2 Enter the folder for the new program to be created NC NC 3 If you desire to directly create a new program file press this softkey and proceed to Step 4 Hew Note If you desire to create a new program directory first press this softkey and proceed as follows before you go to Step 4 Heu Press this softkey to activate the window for creating a new directory directory Enter a desired name for the new directory J Press this softkey to confirm your entry OK A y Select the new directory with the cursor keys Fa Press this key on the PPU to open the directory 4 Press this softkey to activate the window for creating a new program Hew file 5 Enter the name of the new program If you desire to create a main program it is unnecessary to enter the file extension MPF If you desire to create a subprogram you must enter the file extension SPF The character length of a program name is limited to 24 English characters or 12 Chinese characters It is recommended that you do not use any special characters in the program name J 6 Press this softkey to confirm your entry The part program editor window opens Enter the blocks in OK the window which are saved automatically Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 29 4 2 Editing part programs Overview A part program or sections of a par
240. of rotation after end of cycle Under SDAC the direction of rotation after end of cycle is programmed For tapping the direction is changed automatically by the cycle MPIT and PIT thread lead as a thread size and as a value The value for the thread lead can be defined either as the thread size for metric threads between M3 and M48 only or as a value distance from one thread turn to the next as a numerical value Any parameters not required are omitted in the call or assigned the value zero RH or LH threads are defined by the sign of the lead parameters e Positive value gt right same as M3 e Negative value gt left same as M4 If the two lead parameters have conflicting values alarm 61001 Thread lead wrong is generated by the cycle and cycle execution is aborted POSS spindle position Before tapping the spindle is stopped with orientation in the cycle by using the command SPOS and switched to position control The spindle position for this spindle stop is programmed under POSS SST speed Parameter SST contains the spindle speed for the tapping block with G331 SST1 retraction speed The speed for retraction from the tapped hole is programmed under SST1 If this parameter is assigned the value zero retraction is carried out at the speed programmed under SST Programming and Operating Manual Turning 136 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 AXN tool axis By programming the drilling axis via AXN it is possibl
241. ogramming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 83 8 7 Acceleration control and exact stop continuous path 8 7 1 Exact stop continuous path control mode G9 G60 G64 Functionality G functions are provided for optimum adaptation to different requirements to set the traversing behavior at the block borders and for block advancing For example you would like to quickly position with the axes or you would like to machine path contours over multiple blocks Programming G60 Exact stop modal G64 Continuous path mode G9 Exact stop non modal G601 Exact stop window fine G602 Exact stop window coarse Exact stop G60 G9 If the exact stop function G60 or G9 is active the velocity for reaching the exact end position at the end of a block is decelerated to zero Another modal G group can be used here to set when the traversing movement of this block is considered ended and the next block is started e G601 Exact stop window fine Block advance takes place when all axes have reached the Exact stop window fine value in the machine data e G602 Exact stop window coarse Block advance takes place when all axes have reached the Exact stop window coarse value in the machine data The selection of the exact stop window has a significant influence on the total time if many positioning operations are executed Fine adjustments require more time See the following illustration for comparison of the G60 and
242. ol width defined incorrectly and machining is aborted The alarm will also appear if a cutting edge width equal to zero is detected in the cycle G90G95G618 Absolute dimensioning in the Z X plane revolutional feedrate T8 Tool call M01 Optional stop M3S1000 Spindle speed M08 Coolant ON G0X502Z10 Starting point before the beginning of the cycle G1F0 1 Specification of technology values Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 157 CYCLE93 30 00000 24 00000 7 00000 5 00000 1 00000 1 00000 0 20000 0 20000 1 50000 0 20000 5 1 00000 Cycle call GOX50 Z100 Retraction safety position M9 Coolant OFF STA1 angle Use the STA1 parameter to program the angle of the oblique line at which the groove is to be machined The angle can assume values between 0 and 180 degrees and always refers to the longitudinal axis Note For transverse grooving the angle STA1 is usually 90 degrees paraxial case ANG1 and ANG2 flank angle Asymmetric grooves can be described by flank angles specified separately The angles can assume values between 0 and 89 999 degrees RCO1 RCO2 and RCI1 RCI2 radius chamfer The form of the groove can be modified by entering radii chamfers at the margin or at the base It is imperative to enter the radii with positive sign and the chamfers with negative sign How the programmed chamfers are taken into account is specified in dependen
243. olation with feedrate G1 Functionality The tool moves from the starting point to the end point along a straight path For the path velocity is determined by the programmed F word All the axes can be traversed simultaneously G1 remains active until canceled by another instruction from this G group GO G2 G3 See the following illustration for linear interpolation with G1 Programming example NO5 G54 GO G90 X40 Z200 S500 M3 The tool traverses in rapid traverse spindle speed 500 r p m clockwise N10 Gl Z120 FO 15 Linear interpolation with feedrate 0 15 mm revolution N15 X45 2105 N20 280 N25 GO X100 Retraction in rapid traverse N30 M2 End of program Note Another option for linear programming is available with the angle specification ANG 8 4 Circular interpolation 8 4 1 Circular interpolation G2 G3 Functionality The tool moves from the starting point to the end point along a circular path The direction is determined by the G function Clockwise Counterclockwise Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 73 The description of the desired circle can be given in various ways G2 G3 and center point parameter end point G2 G3 and radius parameter end point End point X Z End point X Z e g G2 X Z CR e g G2 X Z 1 K Circle radius CR Center point K Starting point X Z G2 G3 and specification of apertur
244. ollowing softkey to continue searching your desired user data Continue search 2 4 Use this key or move the cursor to confirm your entries A 6 Other settings in JOG mode WA m Y eiiiai NC MPF 41 MPF SIEMENS A Reset ROY Position Repos offset T F 5 MX1 0 0006 a IT I D1 6 668 mm 70 Axi MZ1 8 888 F tte nn min Feedrate 6 S1 0 0 88 G1 G566 6 G60 T s n 0000 Act val Work WCS Act val Mach MCS a iee Opens the T S M window where you can activate tools see Section Activating the tool Page 19 set spindle speed and direction see Section Activating the spindle Page 21 and select a G code or other M functions for activating the settable work offset Switches the display to the relative coordinate system You can set the reference point in this coordinate system For detailed information refer to Section Setting the relative coordinate system REL Page 206 Opens the tool measurement window where you determine the tool offset data For detailed information about this window refer to Section Measuring the tool manually Page 22 Opens the Manual Machine Plus user interface This softkey is visible only if this software option is pre configured by the machine manufacturer For detailed information about this window refer to the manual Manual Machine Plus Turning Opens the setti
245. on and the AMM tool connects to the control system selected re Connect Executing from external through Ethernet connection The external execution through the Ethernet connection requires connecting a network drive based on the network connection A connected network drive allows you to access a shared directory on your PC PG from the control system Creating and connecting a network drive Proceed as follows to create and connect a network drive 1 SYSTEM 2 VA SHIFT ALARM 46 Share a directory on your local disk on your PC PG Select the desired operating area on the PPU of the control system Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP 10 0BA1 08 2013 3 Press this key to view the extended softkeys 4 Enter the network configuration window through the following softkey operations AY Serv Service Service displ gt control network Kee 5 Press this softkey to go to the window for configuring the network drives config 6 Place the cursor on a free drive using the cursor keys f Press this key to move the cursor to the following input fields a Example Server Share name Specify the three input fields as required e 1 The user name of your Windows account e The logon password case sensitive of your Windows account e The IP address of the server and the share name of the shared directory on your PC PG Example 140 231 196 90 808D_T Add 8 Press this softkey
246. ontrol system provides comprehensive online help Whenever necessary you can call the help system from any operating area The help system Press this key or the key combination lt ALT gt lt H gt to call the help system from any operating area If a HELP context sensitive help exists Window 1 opens otherwise Window opens mall 11 02 15 Ref Point 2012711729 SIEHEHS manual kea Search o epi z 7 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 207 O Calls the context sensitive help for the current topic e Current operating window e NC drive alarms selected in the alarm specific operation area e Machine data or setting data selected e Drive data selected Calls the machine manufacturer developed PDF manual Displays all available help information e Siemens help manuals e Machine manufacturer developed help manuals if any Softkeys in Window PAE Use this softkey to select cross references topig A cross reference is marked by the characters gt gt lt lt Note This softkey is displayed only if the current page contains a cross reference Sern Searches for a term in the current topic neme Continues search for the next term that matches the search criteria search ee Exit Softkeys in Window Zooms in the current view Zooms out the current view Zooms the current view to page width Jumps to the desir
247. opic Drilling centering CYCLE81 Page 127 DTB dwell time The dwell time must be programmed in seconds It is only effective in tapping without encoder SDR direction of rotation for retraction SDR 0 must be set if the spindle direction is to reverse automatically If the machine data is defined such that no encoder is set in this case machine data MD30200 MA_NUM_ENCS is 0 the parameter must be assigned the value 3 or 4 for the direction of rotation otherwise alarm 61202 No spindle direction programmed is output and the cycle is aborted SDAC direction of rotation Because the cycle can also be called modally see Section Graphical cycle support in the program editor Page 123 it requires a direction of rotation for tapping further threaded holes This is programmed in parameter SDAC and corresponds to the direction of rotation programmed before the first call in the higher level program If SDR 0 the value assigned to SDAC has no meaning in the cycle and can be omitted in the parameterization ENC tapping If tapping is to be performed without encoder although an encoder exists parameter ENC must be assigned value 1 If however no encoder is installed and the parameter is assigned the value O it is ignored in the cycle MPIT and PIT thread lead as a thread size and as a value The parameter for the lead is only relevant if tapping is performed with encoder The cycle calculates the feedrate from the spind
248. orntroranrorattoratreranrerarreranrenani 3 2 1 SUING a New COON 2 Se aca acces ace cree cal ace ess ae een eee seit cess EIEN I EEEE RE r i arka 3 2 2 PAGINA Me NOON in deteteetieciat steed tase toned ta acted i E Oa a wabalanbniiateubud 3 2 3 ASSINO INE WANGWMECliartactantinnasantnnianninetartontirehtnartsattoninminidattontntihadattnnwontintattonterntinatattondtans 19 3 2 4 Activating the spindle vitessinicnctaarianeaieutsaniiei iecamidsioeutindaainntateh vie dacantadsiwnibiadsadnetiadea Weidaedamsiianawaledigaawtieruaes 3 2 0 Measuring the tool manually i ccsescccas cas s0ccsssebeees cacaenees cxhvbes ancsenusserscdessedseaesesuseedseudesbossoencsesecdaeaetnccbubes cele 3 2 6 Verifying the tool offset result in MDA MOE ccccsecccesneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeesaaeeeeseeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeaeeeeeas 3 2 7 Entering modifying the tool Wear data ccccceccccseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesseeeeesaeeeeesenseesaeeeeseneeesaees 3 3 Operating area OVELVICW cccceeccccceeceeceeeeee ee eeeee se eeee ea eeee sane ntr AG eeAEA GS eeEA Gs Eeesa aa eeesA aS eees aa Setsa a eeesaaeeesaaeeeesaaeees A Pant programimin ssia aE geese AA E EAA AA AEA EA EARNER RAR 4 1 Creating a part PDrograii sas assests cee hese aac eta es ETE RANE EAn Erai dai ASAE EATER RASAK a RATRAT AAN Eis TARANAN ERE 4 2 ECIUMG DEPOA a E S 4 3 Managing part Programs eserini E emul ea rleninerl dake eate 5 AUTOMATIC IMAGINING ssar AA EA R EA RANES 5 1 Perorm
249. orresponding function is selected A limitation of the spindle speed in the Max For thread cutting a start position for the spindle is G26 Min G25 fields can only be performed displayed as the start angle A multiple thread can be cut within the limit values defined in the machine data by changing the angle when the thread cutting operation is repeated Setting the time counter Operating sequence to 1 Select the desired operating area 2 Open the setting data window Taj sett SD data Tine 3 Open the time counter window counter 4 Position the cursor bar in the input fields to be modified and enter the values see table below for A the parameter descriptions B 5 Use this key or move the cursor to confirm your entries Programming and Operating Manual Turning 202 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Parameters in the window for timers and workpiece counters Times Counter Q Parts in total B 2 Parts required 5 3 Part count H 4 Run tine HH66H HEM BAS Cycle time HHHH H Hm HAS Cutting time aoo0H HAM GOs Q Setup time HHiFH ZZM Power on time HO6HH 48M The total number of workpieces produced total The run time of the selected NC program in seconds actual The default value is 0 each time a new NC program starts up MD27860 can be set to ensure that this value will be deleted even if there is a jump to the beginning of the program with GOTOS or in the event of ASUBS
250. outine Frequently recurring machining sequences are stored in subroutines e g certain contour shapes These subroutines are called at the appropriate locations in the main program and then executed One form of a subroutine is the machining cycle Machining cycles contain universally valid machining scenarios By assigning values via included transfer parameters you can adapt the subroutine to your specific application Layout The structure of a subroutine is identical to that of a main program see Section Program structure Page 55 Like main programs subroutines contain M2 end of program in the last block of the program sequence This means a return to the program level where the subroutine was called from End of program The end instruction RET can also be used instead of the M2 program end in the subroutine The RET instruction is used when G64 continuous path mode is not to be interrupted by a return With M2 G64 is interrupted and exact stop is initiated See the following example of a sequence when a subroutine is called in a two channel manner Main program Sequence MAIN123 N21 Subprogram N80 L10 Call 4 X Programming and Operating Manual Turning 116 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Subroutine name The subprogram is given a unique name allowing it to be selected from several subroutines When you create the program the program name may be freely selected provided the following conventions are obs
251. parameter has a different value the cycle will abort with alarm 61002 Machining type defined incorrectly The cycle carries out a contour monitoring such that a reasonable groove contour results This is not the case if the radii chamfers come into contact or intersect at the groove base or if you try to carry out a face grooving operation at a contour segment located parallel to the longitudinal axis In such cases the cycle will abort with alarm 61603 Groove form defined incorrectly _VRT variable retraction path The retraction path can be programmed in the _VRT parameter on the basis of the outside or inside diameter of the groove For VRT 0 parameter not programmed the tool is retracted by 1 mm The retraction path is always measured according to the programmed system of units inch or metric The same retraction path is also used for chip breaking after each depth infeed into the groove Note Before calling the grooving cycle a double edged tool must be enabled The offset values for the two cutting edges must be stored in two successive D numbers of the tool whereby the first of which must be activated prior to the first cycle call The cycle itself defines for which machining step it will use which of the two tool compensation values and will also enable them automatically After completion of the cycle the tool compensation number programmed prior to the cycle call is active again If no D number is programmed for a tool compens
252. positioned to 0 axis mode can be used in the next block N60 X50 C180 Spindle C axis is traversed with linear interpolation synchronous to X N70 Z220 SPOS 90 Spindle is positioned to 90 degrees N80 M30 Program variant 2 N10 GO X100 z100 N20 M3 S500 N30 GO X80 280 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 91 N40 G01 X60 Z60 FO 25 N50 M2 70 Spindle switches to axis mode N60 X50 C180 Spindle C axis is traversed with linear interpolation synchronous to X N70 Z20 SPOS 90 Spindle is positioned to 90 degrees N80 M30 Example 3 Drill cross holes in turned part Cross holes are to be drilled in this turned part The running spindle is stopped at zero degrees and then successively turned through 90 stopped and so on GO X100 7100 N110 S2 1000 M2 3 Switch on cross drilling attachment N120 SPOSA DC 0 Set main spindle to 0 immediately the program will advance to the next block straight away N125 GO X34 Z 35 Switch on the drill while the spindle is taking up position N130 WAITS Wait for the main spindle to reach its position N135 Gl G94 X10 F250 Feedrate in mm min G96 is suitable only for the multi edge turning tool and synchronous spindle but not for power tools on the cross slide N140G0 X34 N145 SPOS IC 90 The spindle is positioned through 90 with read halt in a positive direction N150 Gl X10 N155 GO X34 N160 SPOS AC 180 The spindle is positioned at 180
253. r elements you have already programmed if required You may have forgotten to enter all of the known data The coordinate system scaling is automatically adapted to changes in the complete contour The position of the coordinate system is displayed in the graphics window An element was selected using the cursor keys Pressing the following softkey allows you to enlarge the image section of the selected element Follower elenent Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 223 A 12 5 Undercuts for turning technology Supplementary conditions The form E and F undercut and form DIN 76 and general thread undercut functions are only activated when the turning technology is enabled Form E and F undercuts as well as thread undercuts are available only if level G18 is set Undercuts are permitted only on contour edges of the rotational body which run in the direction of the longitudinal axis usually parallel to the Z axis The longitudinal axis is identified by the machine data The machine data MD 20100 MC_DIAMETER_AX_DEF for turning machines contains the name of the transverse axis usually X The other axis in G18 is the longitudinal axis usually Z If MD 20100 MC_DIAMETER_AX_DEF does not contain a name or contains a name that does not conform to G18 there are no undercuts Undercuts only appear on corners between horizontal and vertical straight lines including any straight lines which are at 0 90
254. r offsetting rotation scaling factor mirroring ATRANS Z programmable offset additive to existing instructions TRANS without values clears old instructions for offset rotation scaling factor mirroring The instructions that contain TRANS or ATRANS each require a separate block Programming example N10 G54 N20 TRANS Z5 programmable offset 5 mm in Z axis N30 L10 Subroutine call contains the geometry to be offset N40 ATRANS X10 programmable offset 10 mm in x axis N50 TRANS offset cleared N60 M30 Subroutine call Refer to Section Subroutine technique Page 116 Programming example2 G90 G18 G500 T3D1 M4S1500 GOX50 Z10 CYCLE95 CON1 CON1_E 0 50000 0 20000 0 20000 0 20000 0 20000 0 15000 9 2 00000 M4S1200 GOX100Z 10 RO 46 LAB1 TRANS X RO0 Z 25 AROT RPL 10 R1 45 R2 14 R3 34 LAB TRANS X R0 Z 25 AROT RPL 10 R5 R2 COS R1 R6 R3 SIN R1 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 G1 Z R5 X R6 R1 R1 0 5 IF R1 gt 151 GOTOB LAB RO RO0 0 5 IF RO gt 40 GOTOB LAB G0X80 Z50 AROT TRANS G500 T5D1 M4S1000 G1F0 1 CYCLE93 58 00000 36 00000 22 00000 0 90000 0 10000 0 10000 0 50000 0 10000 5 2 00000 G0X80 Z50 T3D1 M4S1500 RO 29 BB TRANS Z 52 X RO DIAMOF R4 720 LL R1 3 14159 R4 180 R2 SIN R4 G1 X R2 Z R1 R4 R4 0 5 IF R4 gt 0 GOTOB LL DIAMON RO RO 0 5 IF RO gt 27 GOTOB BB GOX80
255. ram ensure that all modal functions are set the way you need them to be Please make sure that the values of your arithmetic parameters used in upper program levels are not inadvertently changed in lower program levels When working with SIEMENS cycles up to 7 program levels are needed Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 117 8 16 2 Calling machining cycles turning Functionality Cycles are technology subroutines that realize a certain machining process Adaptation to the particular problem is performed directly via supplying parameters values when calling the respective cycle Programming example N10 DEF REAL RTP RFP SDIS DP DTB N20 G18 X100 2100 N30 M3 S100 FO 1 N40 G17 XO N50 CYCLE83 110 90 0 80 0 Site 0 Call of cycle 83 transfer values directly Oy 0 0 1 0 separate block N60 GO X100 z100 N70 RTP 100 RFP 95 5 SDIS 2 4 DP 20 set transfer parameters for cycle 82 DTB 3 N80 CYCLE82 RTP RFP SDIS DP DTB Call of cycle 82 separate block N90 M30 8 16 3 Executing external subroutines EXTCALL Function With the EXTCALL command you can reload and execute programs stored on an external USB memory stick Machine data The following machine data is used for the EXTCALL command e MD10132 MN_MMC_CMD_TIMEOUT Monitoring time for the command in part program e MD18362 MN_MM_EXT_PROG_NUM Number of program levels that can be processed simultaneously from extern
256. rating Manual Turning 12 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 1 4 Protection levels Overview The SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED provides a concept of protection levels for enabling data areas Different protection levels control different access rights The control system delivered by SIEMENS is set by default to the lowest protection level 7 without password If the password is no longer known the control system must be reinitialized with the default machine drive data All passwords are then reset to default passwords for this software release Note Before you boot the control system with default machine drive data make sure that you have backed up your machine drive data otherwise all data are lost after rebooting with default machine drive data Protection level Locked by oO Siemenspassword sd Siemens reserved Ee Manufacturer password Machine manufacturers 20 Reserved S y y O 3 6 End user password End users Default password CUSTOMER Protection level 1 Protection level 1 requires a manufacturer password With this password entry you can perform the following operations e Entering or changing part of the machine data and drive data e Conducting NC and drive commissioning Protection level 3 6 Protection level 3 6 requires an end user password With this password entry you can perform the following operations e Entering or changing part of the machine data and drive data e Editing programs e Setting offset values e
257. rectly after the cycle for finishing has been called P4 50 41 547 P3 70 21 547 P1 100 10 N110 G18 DIAMOF G90 G96 FO 8 N120 S500 M3 N130 T1 D1 N140 GO X70 N150 727160 N160 CYCLE95 START END 2 5 0 8 0 8 0 0 8 0 75 0 6 1 Cycle call N170 GO X70 2160 N175 M02 START N180 GL X10 Z100 F0 6 N190 Z90 N200 Z770 ANG 150 N210 Z750 ANG 135 N220 Z50 X50 END N230 M02 Programming example 3 Proceed through the following steps 1 Select the desired operating area PROGRAM u 2 Open the vertical softkey bar for available turning cycles A Turn Programming and Operating Manual Turning 174 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Stock 3 renoval 4 a 5 Cont Accept 6 elenent T amp a R Tas oN Accept 8 element Press this softkey to open the window for CYCLE95 Enter a name in the first input field PAN 18 22 46 Tea 2012 12 08 N MPFAC MPF 1 Name of contour subroutine Attach contour Cancel Press one of the following two softkeys The program automatically jumps to the program editor screen form If you desire to edit and store the contour in a subroutine press this softkey Hew file Attach If you desire to edit and store the contour as a section of a main program press contour this softkey Press this softkey to open the contour editor Parameterize the contour elements step by step Initially you define a contour starting point and
258. rills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate to the entered final drilling depth Deep hole drilling is performed with a depth infeed of a maximum definable depth executed several times increasing gradually until the final drilling depth is reached The drill can either be retracted to the reference plane safety clearance after every infeed depth for swarf removal or retracted by 1 mm each time Sequence Position reached prior to cycle start The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 131 The cycle creates the sequence below Deep hole drilling with chip removal VARI 1 e Approach of the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance by using GO e Traversing to the first drilling depth with G1 the feedrate for which is derived from the feedrate defined with the program call which is subject to parameter FRF feedrate factor e Dwell time at final drilling depth parameter DTB e Retraction to the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance for swarf removal by using GO e Dwell time at the starting point parameter DTS e Approach of the drilling depth last reached reduced by anticipation distance by using GO e Traversing to the next drilling depth with G1 sequence of motions is continued until the final drilling depth is reached e Retraction to the retraction plane with GO RIP Bwwy REP SDIS G
259. rmed For details on the reactions please refer to the individual cycles Planar contour monitoring No contour violation Contour violation 9 5 2 Cutoff CYCLE92 Programming CYCLE92 SPD SPL DIAG1 DIAG2 RC SDIS SV1 SV2 SDAC FF1 FF2 SS2 0 VARI 1 0 AMODE Parameters Description Depth for speed reduction absolute RC Safety clearance to be added to the reference point enter without sign REAL SV2 Maximum speed at constant cutting speed Direction of spindle rotation 4 M4 Reduced spindle speed as far as final depth INT Internal parameter only the default value 0 is possible Machining type Values 0 Retraction to the reference plane brought forward by SPD and SDIS 1 No retraction at the end Internal parameter only the default value 1 is possible PSYS Internal parameter only the default value 0 is possible Alternate mode radius or chamfer Values 10000 radius 11000 chamfer Programming and Operating Manual Turning 152 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Function CYCLEQ2 is used to cut off balanced parts for example screws bolts or pipes dynamically You can program a chamfer or rounding on the edge of the machined part You can machine at a constant cutting rate V or speed S up to a depth DIAG1 from which point the workpiece is machined at a constant speed As of depth DIAG2 you can also program a reduced feedrate FF2 or a reduced speed SS2 in order to adapt the velocity
260. rnatively you have the option to define positions using polar coordinates When programming contours you can define a pole at any time prior to using polar coordinates for the first time Programmed polar coordinates subsequently refer to this pole The pole is modal and can be re defined at any time It is always entered in absolute Cartesian coordinates The contour calculator converts values entered as polar coordinates into Cartesian coordinates Positions can be programmed in polar coordinates only after a pole has been specified The pole input does not generate a code for the NC program Pole The polar coordinates are valid in the level selected with G17 to G19 p The pole is a contour element that can be edited which itself does not contribute to the contour It r can be entered when the starting point of the contour is defined or anywhere within the contour The pole cannot be created before the starting point of the contour Programming and Operating Manual Turning 224 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 This softkey allows you to specify a pole and can only be entered in absolute Cartesian Pole coordinates This softkey is also present in the starting point screen This enables the pole to be entered at the start of a contour so that the first contour element can be entered in polar coordinates Further notes If the straight line that was generated with close contour is linked to the start element of the contour with a ra
261. rning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 G3 2 35 X60 K AC 43 372 I AC 2 384 Gils AROS Z 68 X70 Z 84 X80 CONOZ E Programming example 3 Relief Groove Form E R1 00 M20X 2 5 6g roa ee ae 40 i A 7 15 Pi 20 50 N10 GOO G90 G95 G40 G71 N20 LIMS 4500 N30 T1 D1 ROUGH TURN N40 G96 S250 M03 M08 eE e OE eE N60 G01 X 2 0 F0 35 N70 GOO 22 0 N80 X52 0 CYCLE95 DEMO SUB A 2 50000 0 20000 0 10000 0 15000 0 35000 0 20000 0 15000 9 r N90 GOO G40 X500 0 2500 0 N100 M01 N110 T2 D1 FINISH TURN N120 G96 S350 M03 M08 N130 GOO X22 0 Z0 0 N140 G01 X 2 0 F0 15 N150 GOO 22 0 N160 X52 0 N170 CYCLE95 DEMO SUB A y 0 15000 5 N180 GOO G40 X500 0 2500 0 N190 MO1 N200 T3 D1 GROOVE N210 G96 200 M03 M08 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 195 N220 N230 CYCLE93 30 00000 30 50000 7 00000 5 00000 0 00000 0 00000 1 00000 0 00000 0 20000 0 10000 2 50000 0 50000 11 N240 GOO G40 X500 0 2500 0 N250 M01 N260 T4 D1 THREAD N270 G95 150 M03 M08 N280 GOO X50 0 210 0 N290 CYCLE99 20 0 00000 18 00000 20 00000 20 00000 2 00000 0 01000 29 00000 0 00000 8 2 3 1 N300 GOO G40 x500 0 2500 0 N310 M01 N320 T5 D1 CUT OFF N330 G96 S200 M03 M08 N340 GOO X55 0 Z10 0 N350 CYCLE92 40 00000 50 00000 6 00000 1 00000 0 50000 0 20000 0 08000 500 00000 0 O 1 O N360 GOO G40 x500 0 2500 0 N370 M30
262. rogram cont test 4 Press this key on the MCP to run the program The setpoint display simulates the traverse A movements 5 Press this key to stop the program test I y p prog RESET Testing the program with AFL The AFL auxiliary function lock function disables the spindle and suppresses all auxiliary functions Auxiliary function Fecate OO o Spinde speed o B O Mfunctions o Mo O functions o OB OS When the AFL is active you can test the part program by checking the axis movement Only one of the functions PRT and AFL can be active at the same time Before starting the program test first remove the workpiece from the machine Proceed as follows to test a part program in AFL mode 1 Select the desired operating area M MACHINE 2 Switch to AUTO mode gt witch to mode AUTO 3 Press this softkey to open the lower level menu for program control NC Prog cont Auxili 4 Press this vertical softkey to activate the AFL function uxiliary func OFF 5 Press this key on the MCP to close the door in the machine if you do not use this function just close the door in the machine manually Make sure the feedrate override is 0 DOOR FA 6 Press this key on the MCP to run the program T Turn the feedrate override switch slowly to the desired value 8 Press this key to stop the program test Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 39 5 4 Star
263. ror the coordinate axis separate block AMIRROR Additive programmable mirroring G17 X Y plane when center drilling 6 Plane selection TRANSMIT milling required G18 Z X plane standard turning G19 Y Z plane G40 Tool radius compensation OFF 7 Tool radius compensation modally effective Tool radius compensation along the moving direction of the tool always left of contour Tool radius compensation along the moving direction of the tool always right of contour Settable work offset OFF 1 Settable work offset 2 Settable work offset 3 Settable work offset 4 Settable work offset 5 Settable work offset 6 Settable work offset Settable work offset OFF non modal G500 4 5 effective QIIO O01 O1 Oo gt gt NIO N 8 9 3 G153 Q1 Oo 9 Suppressing the settable work Settable work offset OFF non modal offset non modal including base frame G60 Exact stop 10 Approach behavior modally G64 Continuous path mode effective G62 Corner deceleration at inside corners when Only in conjunction with G62 Z G1 tool radius offset is active G41 G42 continuous path mode Non modal exact stop 11 Non modal exact stop non modal Exact stop window fine with G60 G9 12 Exact stop window modally LI 8 Settable work offset modally LT G601 G602 G621 Exact stop window coarse with G60 G9 Corner deceleration at all corners Only in conjunction with G621 AI
264. s 4 Enter the tool length wear parameter of axis X and axis Z as well as the tool radius wear parameter Positive value The tool moves away from the workpiece Negative value The tool moves closer to the workpiece 5 Press this key or move the cursor to activate the compensation an Jog Tool wear Type T D Wear x z Radius E ii H Hbi H 666 Hpg E Z H Hbi H Hbi H Hbi Programming and Operating Manual Turning 26 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 3 3 Operating area overview When working with the CNC you need to set up the machine and the tools etc as follows e Create the tools and cutting edges e Enter modify the tool and work offsets e Enter the setting data Softkey functions Pressing this key on the PPU allows you to open the following window OFFSET 10 y EHAA Tool list Heasure tool New 8 tool Edges Delete tool Search 1 tice LE CE lee Creates a new tool For more information see Section tool Page 17 o Opens a lower level menu for cutting edge settings For more information see Section cutting edge 198 D Displays and modifies the R variables Gd Removes the currently selected tool from the tool list 6 Configures and displays lists of setting data Searches for your desired tool with the tool number Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 2 4 Part programming The SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED control system can store a max
265. s N20 G17 X0 260 Approach drilling position N30 Gl F200 Setting the path feedrate N40 CYCLE840 3 0 y 15 0 0 y 70 3 5 3 Cycle call without safety clearance N50 M2 End of program 9 4 8 Reaming1 CYCLE85 Programming CYCLE85 RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR DTB FFR RFF Parameters Data type REAL Retraction plane absolute REAL Reference plane absolute SDIS REAL Safety clearance enter without sign DP REAL Final drilling depth absolute DPR REAL Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane enter without sign ae REAL Dwell time at final drilling depth chip breakage REAL Feedrate RFF REAL Retraction feedrate Function The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate velocity to the entered final drilling depth The inward and outward movement is performed at the feedrate assigned to FFR and RFF respectively This cycle can be used for reaming of bore holes Sequence Position reached prior to cycle start The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane Programming and Operating Manual Turning 142 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 See the following illustration for sequence of operations The cycle creates the following sequence of motions e Approach of the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance by using GO e Traversing to the final drilling depth with G1 and at the feedrate programmed under the parameter FFR e Dwell time at fin
266. s cies ae ie seme E se ee E 1 1 SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED operator Ppanels ccccccccccceeccceeeecececeeeeeaeeceseecessecessueeeseeeeseeeesaeeesaaees 1 1 1 ITENGE aos cinte cise crane se caceige aed neces secannce oteumenaaet ane se E ueeeeceeneaneaneee 1 1 2 Control elements On the PPU cccccccsssecceeeeecceececceseeeceeueeeceeeecseaeeessseecsegeeeseaueeessueeesseneeessueeessegeeeeas 1 2 Machine control panels cco teieescds cate scoot ce oanddu cece tee ardante eiTe cand donb NE aera ntedececteddenavedede iden nc sands etedmnenaedites 1 2 1 OC acc ocate AE co EEE AEE NE A EENEN A ss becca A E AEE A ETE 1 2 2 Comirol clements On the MCP spores cctacsss cca cemseore dane aiee a io an a eN aiaee 1 3 Sere AE e 6 0 E ee E EE E E E E EEE EE EE E EEE EE E EE S 1 4 Protection levo Beernink aA ENE EA AEE EEEE AAE EEEE a aaa 1 5 Setting user interface language ccccccseececceeseecsenseccaeseeecsuececseeeccsueeesseceeseuseessuseeessueeessaueeessuneeesaeees Turning on reference point approach cccsecceeccseecseeceeceeeceeceneceecseecseeseeeeeesenecsuesaeesaeecaeeteeseeesegetaeesaeesaeesenens SLEA NO PA N A E ENE E T A E AT MEN N E TS A T E EN A E E E E 3 1 Coordinate systems cccccccssscccceeeecceeececceueeecseuseesauececseuseecsauseessecesseueeessaeceessueeessaueeessueeessaueeessenseesaeees 3 2 Setting up tools a nnnennnnennnnennnnernrsersrssrnrssrrrserrrosrnrosrrrosrsrosnsrosnnronnrontrorneroratr
267. s provided Note CYCLE84 can be used if the spindle to be used for the boring operation is technically able to be operated in the position controlled spindle operation Sequence Position reached prior to cycle start The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane The cycle creates the following sequence of motions e Approach of the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance by using GO e Oriented spindle stop value in the parameter POSS and switching the spindle to axis mode e Tapping to final drilling depth and speed SST e Dwell time at thread depth parameter DTB e Retraction to the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance speed SST1 and direction reversal e Retraction to the retraction plane with GO spindle mode is reinitiated by reprogramming the spindle speed active before the cycle was called and the direction of rotation programmed under SDAC Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 135 Explanation of the parameters For the parameters RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR refer to Section Drilling centering CYCLE81 Page 127 See the following parameters for CYCLE84 c gt GO gt C331 gt G332 gt gt G4 o O L LI LI a RTP RFP SDIS RFP DP RFP DPR DTB dwell time The dwell time must be programmed in seconds When tapping blind holes it is recommended that you omit the dwell time SDAC direction
268. select how to approach the starting point Note Steps 5 to 10 below describe basic steps for contour element edits For more information about programming in the contour editor refer to Section Free contour programming Page 216 Press this softkey to confirm the settings Select a desired machining direction and shape with the corersponding softkey Specify the corresponding coordinates according to the drawings The selected direction appears on the top left of the screen and the corresponding descriptive text is given in the information line at the bottom of the screen J 2012 12 01 Straight line vertical Alter native Trans to next element CHR O 6 666 Free text input All para meters Contour allowance 0 800 Right O Cancel End point X E Zoom a i Press this softkey to confirm the settings Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 175 9 Select different elements to define the contour until you complete the contour programming 10 Press this softkey to store the contour information Accept Tech 11 Press this softkey to return to the screen form for CYCLE95 Parameterize the cycle technology interface data as desired z 12 Confirm your settings with this softkey The cycle is then automatically transferred to the program OK editor Note The cycle program created as a section of the main program must be stored after the M30 command Ea Re 1
269. should contain all data required to execute a machining step Generally a block consists of several words and is always completed with the end of block character Lr Linefeed When writing a block this character is automatically generated when pressing the linefeed key on an externally connected keyboard or pressing the following key on the PPU See the following block structure diagram Word 1 Comment LF iE Space Space End of block character Block instructions only if required is written at the end delimited from the remaining part of the block by Block number stands in front of instructions Only as needed instead of N main blocks have the symbol Colon Block skip only if necessary stands at the beginning Total number of characters in a block 512 characters Word order If there are several instructions in a block the following order is recommended N G X Z F S T D M H Programming and Operating Manual Turning 232 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Note regarding block numbers First select the block numbers in steps of 5 or 10 Thus you can later insert blocks and nevertheless observe the ascending order of block numbers Block skip Blocks of a program which are to be executed not with each program run can be marked by a slash in front of the block number The block skip itself is activated via Operation program control SKP or by the programmab
270. ss this key to select the spindle direction T S H Tool change Di Please move turret to a safe position Spindle speed GAA rpm Spindle direction Ha O Activate WO oO Other H function Press CYCLE START to activate above functions Heas T5444 p tool 6 Use this key or move the cursor to confirm your entries T Press this key on the MCP to activate the spindle Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 21 3 2 5 Measuring the tool manually Overview The geometries of the machining tool must be taken into consideration when you execute a part program These are stored as tool offset data in the tool list Each time the tool is called the control considers the tool offset data You can determine the tool offset data including the length radius and diameter by either measuring the tool or entering the values in the tool list see Section Creating a new tool Page 17 for more information As per the actual position of the point F the machine coordinate and the reference point the control system can calculate the offset value assigned to the lengths for the X and Z axes F Toolholder reference point M Machine zero point W Workpiece zero X actual position The offset value in the X axis is a diameter value machine Workpiece Z actual position machine Figure 3 1 Determining the length offsets using the example of a turning tool F Toolholder referenc
271. t path A ACP Absolute dimensions approach position in positive direction A ACN Absolute dimensions approach position in negative direction Example N10 A ACP 55 7 approach absolute position 55 7 degrees in positive direction 8 9 Spindle movements 8 9 1 Spindle speed S directions of rotation Functionality The spindle speed is programmed under the address S in revolutions per minute if the machine has a controlled spindle The direction of rotation and the beginning or end of the movement are specified via M commands Programming M3 Spindle clockwise M4 Spindle counter clockwise M5 Spindle stop Remark For integer S values the decimal point can be omitted e g S270 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 87 Information If you write M3 or M4 in a block with axis movements the M commands become active before the axis movements Standard setting Axis movements will only start once the spindle has accelerated to speed M3 M4 M5 is also issued before the axis movement However it does not wait for the spindle to stop Axis motion already starts before the spindle comes to a standstill The spindle is stopped with the end of the program or with the following key At the beginning of the program the spindle speed is zero SO Note Other settings can be configured via machine data Programming example N10 Gl X70 220 F3 S270 M3 before the axis traversing X Z
272. t program can only be edited if currently not being executed Any modifications to the part program are stored immediately Operating sequence 1 Select the desired operating area 2 Enter the program directory H 3 Select the program file you desire to edit You can also search for a file or directory by either e Pressing the following softkey and specifying the desired criteria in the search dialog Search Note the file extension MPF or SPF must be entered if you desire to search for a program file Or e Entering the first character on the main screen of the program directory The system directly navigates to the first file starting with that character 4 Press this key to open the program file The system switches over to the program editor window gt a Execute M3S266 1 Fi666 1 G96G54G66 X 2166 1 N2 G61Z5 f N3 Z 9193 f N5 X 65 Z 9194 f N7 X0 Z 075 f N8 X 6875 ZO f N X Z 1 f N16 X 6938 Z 0542 f N11 X 161 Z 9195 f N12 X Z 125 f N13 X 1155 2 6667 1 N14 X 1227 Z 0708 f N15 X8 Z 15 f N16 X 1165 Z 1165 f N17 X 1625 Z f N18 X 1193 Z 1193 f N1 XB Z 175 f Renumber Search 5 Edit the blocks in the window as required Any program changes are automatically stored See below for the detailed description of the editing options 6 After finishing the editing you can press this softkey to execute the program The system switches Execute to
273. tag nn Radius Length Z L 68 888 mm Programming and Operating Manual Turning 24 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Get 9 Save the length value in the Z axis length Z l 10 Press this softkey and you can see that the compensation data values have been automatically Tool list added to the tool data Repeat the above operations for other tools and make sure you measure all the tools before machining which also eases the tool changing process 3 2 6 Verifying the tool offset result in MDA mode In order to ensure the machine safety and correctness you must test the results of the tool offset appropriately Operating sequence M 1 Select the desired operating area MACHINE 2 Switch to MDA mode MDA Delete 3 Press this softkey on the PPU file 4 Enter the test program for example G500 T1 D1 GOO XO Z5 You can alternatively load an existing part program from a system directory using the following softkey if desired t Load File 5 Press this key to ensure the ROV function is active lit up Note The ROV function activates the feedrate override switch under the GOO function 6 Press this key on the MCP Increase the feedrate override gradually to avoid accidents caused by an axis moving too fast and observe whether the axis moves to the set position ROV Further softkey functions in MDA mode G This window displays important G functions whereby each G function is assigned to a
274. ter of cycle i se 3 4 or 5 for M3 M4 or M5 ee REAL Thread lead as a thread size signed Range of values 3 for M3 to 48 for M48 the sign determines the direction of rotation in the thread REAL Thread lead as a value signed Range of values 0 001 2000 000 mm the sign determines the direction of rotation in the thread POSS REAL Spindle position for oriented spindle stop in the cycle in degrees REAL Speed for tapping Programming and Operating Manual Turning 134 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Data type Description SST REAL Speed for retraction AXN INT Tool axis Values 1 1 1st axis of the current plane 2 2nd axis of the current plane 3 3rd axis of the current plane PSYS Internal parameter only the default value 0 is possible PSYS Internal parameter only the default value 0 is possible INT VARI Machining type Values 0 Tapping in one pass 1 Deep hole tapping with chip breakage 2 Deep hole tapping with chip removal DAM REAL Incremental drilling depth value range 0 lt Max value VRT REAL Variable retraction value for chip breakage value range 0 lt Max value 1 The definition of the 1st 2nd and 3rd axes depends upon the current plane selected Function The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate to the entered final thread depth CYCLE84 can be used to make tapped holes without compensating chuck For tapping with compensating chuck a separate cycle CYCLE840 i
275. the AUTO mode in the machining area Renumbering blocks With this softkey the system automatically assigns block numbers to each block The block Renumber numbers are inserted in front of each block in the ascending order in a step of 10 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 30 6FC5398 5DP 10 0BA1 08 2013 Searching for blocks Proceed through the following steps to search for a block 1 Press this softkey in the opened program editor window Search 2 Press this softkey to search via text Alternatively you can search with a given line number by Text pressing the following softkey Line no 2 Enter the search text or line number in the input field Press this key to select a starting point for search if you choose to search via text J 4 Press this softkey to start the search or otherwise press the following softkey to cancel the search Cancel Copying cutting and pasting blocks Proceed through the following steps to copy cut and paste blocks Hark 1 Press this softkey in the opened program editor window to insert a marker On ry M 2 Use the cursor keys to select the desired program blocks 3 Press the following softkey to copy the selection to the buffer memory Copy Or Press the following key to cut the selection to the buffer memory DEL 4 Place the cursor on the desired insertion point in the program and press this softkey Paste The data is successfully pasted Programming
276. the current plane is Y 1st axis of the current plane is Y 2nd axis of the current plane is Z 3rd axis of the current plane is X 1 If Y axis is present For example to machine a center hole in Z in the G17 plane you program G17 AXN 3 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 141 Programming example Tapping without encoder Tapping is carried out without encoder at position XO the drilling axis is the Z axis The parameters SDR and SDAC for the direction of rotation must be assigned parameter ENC is assigned the value 1 the value for the depth is the absolute value Lead parameter PIT can be omitted A compensating chuck is used in machining N10 G90 GO G54 D1 T6 S500 M3 Specification of technology values N20 G17 XO Z60 Approach drilling position N30 G1 F200 Setting the path feedrate N40 CYCLE840 3 O0 y 15 0 1 4p Sy Ly y p3 Cycle call dwell time 1 s direction of rotation for retraction M4 direction of rotation after cycle M3 no safety clearance The MPIT and PIT parameters have been omitted N50 M2 End of program Programming example Tapping with encoder This program is used for tapping with encoder at position XO The drilling axis is the Z axis The lead parameter must be defined automatic reversal of the direction of rotation is programmed A compensating chuck is used in machining N10 G90 GO G54 D1 T6 S500 M3 Specification of technology value
277. the parameters for this element and press this softkey to confirm e X 48 abs e CHR 3 Press this softkey to select a contour element of straight horizontal line Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to confirm e RND 4 Press this softkey to select a contour element of circular arc Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 229 Dialog select Accept element s Accept element Accept element s Accept element Accept element 11 12 13 14 19 16 17 18 19 20 Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to select the desired contour characteristics e R 23 e X 60 abs e Z 20 abs Press this softkey to select a contour element of straight horizontal line Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to confirm e Z 5 abs e RND 6 Press this softkey to select a contour element of straight line in any direction Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to confirm e X 90 abs e Z 80 abs e RND 4 Press this softkey to select a contour element of straight horizontal line Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to confirm e Z 100 abs Press this softkey to select a contour element of straight vertical line Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to confirm e X 92 abs e CHR 3
278. the programmed end point brought back by the run out path ROP In the transversal axis the starting point defined by the cycle is always by 1 mm above the programmed thread diameter This lift off plane is generated within the control system automatically Interrelation between TDEP FAL NRC and NID thread depth finishing allowance number of roughing and idle passes The programmed finishing allowance acts paraxially and is subtracted from the specified thread depth TDEP the remainder is divided into roughing cuts The cycle will calculate the individual infeed depth automatically depending on the VARI parameter When the thread depth is divided into infeeds with constant cutting cross section the cutting force will remain constant over all roughing cuts In this case the infeed will be performed using different values for the infeed depth A second version is the distribution of the whole thread depth to constant infeed depths When doing so the cutting cross section becomes larger from cut to cut but with smaller values for the thread depth this technology can result in better cutting conditions The finishing allowance FAL is removed after roughing in one step Then the idle passes programmed under parameter NID are executed Programming and Operating Manual Turning 182 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 IANG infeed angle IANG lt 2 By using parameter IANG the angle is defined under which the infeed is carried out in
279. the tool radius data or tool tip width as desired and confirm your settings Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 3 2 2 Activating the tool Operating sequence M L__ MACHINE Select the desired operating area W 2 Switch to JOG mode 3 Open the T S M window 4 Enter the desired tool number for example 1 in the T S M window T 5 H Tool change Di Please move turret to a safe position Spindle speed ror Spindle direction QO Activate WO QO Other H function Press CYCLE START to activate above functions T S H J Set eal Heas 20 REL tool 5 Use this key or move the cursor to confirm your entries 6 Press this key on the MCP to activate the tool 3 2 3 Assigning the handwheel Method 1 Assigning through the MCP 4 1 Select the desired operating area M MACHINE a 2 Press this key on the MCP to control the axis movement with external handwheels HAND WHEEL Ss 3 Press the desired axis traversing key with the handwheel icon The handwheel is assigned hi gt Z Method 2 Assigning through the PPU N 1 Select the desired operating area SHIFT ALARM H 2 Open the machine data window ach data 1 gt Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 19 NC basic 3 List gt 9 i 6 Activate aed T M Ea MACHINE WHEEL Han
280. this monitoring will not be performed If too large arcs are found in the compensation alarm 10931 Incorrect machining contour appears Overhanging contours cannot be machined by CYCLE95 Contours of this type are not monitored by the cycle and consequently there is no alarm Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 171 See the following illustration for contour monitoring X Example of an overhanging contour element in the relief cut that cannot be machined Machining direction Starting point The cycle determines the starting point for the machining operation automatically The starting point is located in the axis in which the depth infeed is carried out shifted from the contour by the amount of the finishing allowance lift off distance parameter _VRT In the other axis it is by finishing allowance _VRT ahead of the contour starting point When the starting point is approached the cutter radius compensation is selected internally in the cycle The last point before the cycle is called must therefore be selected such that this approach is possible without collision and space enough is provided to carry out the appropriate compensatory motion See the following illustration for starting point Total final machining allowance in X _VRT STARTING POINT of the caf Total final machinin allowance in Z _VRT Cycle approach strategy In roughing the starting point determined by the cyc
281. ting and stopping interrupting a part program Starting a part program Before starting a program make sure that both the control system and the machine are set up Observe the relevant safety notes of the machine manufacturer E 1 Select the desired operating area MANAGER 2 Press a horizontal softkey to go to the desired directory A 3 Select the program that you desire to start 4 Press this softkey For some directories press the following softkey instead Execute Ext exe cution The system automatically changes to AUTO mode in the machining operating area after you press the softkey Prog 5 If desired you can use this softkey to specify how you want the program to be executed for more Nc TEE information of the program control refer to Section Program control Page 37 pa 6 Press this key to start the automatic machining of the program Stopping interrupting a part program 7 Press this key to stop the execution of a part program The program currently running is aborted On the next program start the machining starts from the beginning RESET Press this key to interrupt the execution of a part program The axes stop running while the spindle Ea continues running On the next program start the machining is resumed from the interruption point 5 5 Executing transferring a part program from external 5 5 1 Executing transferring through the RS232 interface 5 5 1 1 Configuring RS232 co
282. ting point offset SF A starting point offset is required for the spindle if a multiple start thread or a thread in offset sections is to be machined The starting point offset is programmed in the thread block with G33 under the address SF absolute position If no starting point offset SF is written the value from the setting data Starting angle of thread is active SD 4200 THREAD_START_ANGLE is active Please note A programmed value for SF must always be entered in the setting data Programming example Cylindrical thread double thread starting point offset 180 degrees thread length including run in and run out 100 mm thread lead 4 mm rev N10 G54 GO G90 X50 Z0 S500 M3 Approach starting point clockwise spindle rotation N20 G33 Z 100 K4 SF 0 Lead 4 mm rev N30 GO X54 N40 ZO N50 X50 N60 G33 2 100 K4 SF 180 2nd thread offset by 180 degrees N70 GO X54 N80 ZO N90 GOX502Z50 N100 M30 Multi block thread If multiple thread blocks are programmed consecutively multi block thread it only makes sense to define a starting point offset in the 1st thread block The value is only used here Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 19 Multi block threads are connected automatically in G64 continuous path mode See the following example of multi block thread chaining X A 3rd block with G33 N10 G33 Z K SF N30 N20 Z X K N30 Z X K 2nd block with G33
283. tion is likewise deactivated if one of the other transformations is activated in the relevant channel e g TRACYL Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 63 Example Program code Comment N10 N20 N30 N40 N50 N60 N70 N80 N90 N100 N110 N120 N130 N140 N150 N160 N170 N180 N190 N200 N210 N220 N230 N240 N250 64 T1 D1 G54 G17 G90 F1000 G94 GO X20 210 SPOS 45 SETMS 2 M3 S2000 TRANSMIT ROT RPL 45 DIAMOF Gl X10 Y 10 G41 OFFN 10FFN X 10 Y10 X10 Y 10 Gl 220 G40 OFFN 0 T2 D1 X15 Y 15 Z10 G41 G1 X10 Y 10 X 10 Y10 X10 10 Z20 G40 TRAFOOF SETMS 1 GO X20 210 SPOS 45 M30 Tool selection Approach the starting position Set the second spindle as the main spindle Run the spindle Activate TRANSMIT function Set frame Square roughing 1 mm tolerance Tool change Square finishing Deselect frame Set the first spindle back Approach the starting position Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP 10 0BA1 08 2013 Description Pole There are two ways of passing through the pole e Traverse the linear axis alone e Traverse to the pole rotate the rotary axis at the pole and traveling away from the pole Make the selection using MD 24911 and 24951 Information The turning center with X0 YO is designated as the pole Workpiece machining operations close to the pole are not recommended since these may require sharp feedrate reductio
284. tion on the error cause Clearing criterion Alarm Response 61000 61999 NC_RESET Block preparation in the NC is aborted 62000 62999 Clear key The block preparation is interrupted the cycle can be continued the following key on the MCP after the alarm has been cleared Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 191 9 6 3 Overview of cycle alarms The error numbers are classified as follows a M e e e X 0 General cycle alarms e X 1 Alarms generated by the drilling drilling pattern and milling cycles e X 6 Alarms generated by the turning cycles 9 6 4 Messages in the cycles The cycles display their messages in the message line of the control system These messages will not interrupt the program execution Messages provide information with regard to a certain behavior of the cycles and with regard to the progress of machining and are usually kept beyond a machining step or until the end of the cycle An example of messages is as follows Depth according to the value for the relative depth from all drilling cycles 10 Typical turning program Blank data Blank material Hard aluminum V Blank diameter 50 mm Blank length 60 mm machining length 46 mm clamping length 10 mm Required tools T1 the tool for relief cutting T2 the tool for grooving T3 the tool for thread cutting Programming example 1 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 192 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013
285. tkey to enter the previous page Previous 6 Press either key to return to the main screen of the operation wizard Exit FUNCTION 7 Press one of the following five operating area keys to exit the main screen of the operation wizard A 9 Editing Chinese characters The program editor and PLC alarm text editor both allow you to edit the simplified Chinese characters on the Chinese variant of the HMI Editing simplified Chinese characters gt ALT S Press the key and key to switch the editor on or off aR Press this key to toggle between different input methods SELECT a Eas Press the numeric keys 1 to 9 on the PPU to select the desired characters Example of editing simplified Chinese whe 2012703711 Jog BFR RA KE ABR ETI DIR1 NTR 12 03 11 06 27 38 Bracect MASE 0 CSCs h B71 87 35 14 RE MPF 42 AR Programming and Operating Manual Turning 210 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Structure of editor whe ooo 1 See Fae phd US Ae RP a8 toe Available characters Input field Press the cursor key on the PPU to select Active input method other characters A 10 Pocket calculator The calculator function can be activated from any other operating area using this key on the PPU except in MDA mode m i es NC MPF SIEMENS ore F Reset ROY came MCS Position Repos offset T F S D 1 MAI amel 5 Ne ae MZ1 0 006 er 120 mm min G1 G566 6 T S
286. to add the network drive drive You can delete a selected network drive using the following softkey Delete drive Note that a network drive can be deleted only when it is disconnected 9 Press this softkey to establish the server connection and assign the local shared directory to Connect the network drive You can disconnect a selected network drive using the following softkey Dis connect Executing from external Prerequisites e The AMM tool has been installed on your PC PG e A network connection has been established between the control system and the PC PG e A network drive which includes the part program to be executed has been created and connected Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 47 Proceed as follows to execute a part program from external through the Ethernet connection tn 1 Select the desired operating area on the PPU MANAGER 2 Press this softkey to view the network drive s created 3 Enter the desired network drive which includes the part program to be executed with this key 4 Select the program file you desire to execute 5 Press this softkey and the system automatically switches to AUTO mode in the machining Execute operating area The program is transferred to the buffer memory on the control system and then displayed in the following window Block display Current program TEST_T HPF H6 T H35288 T Fibba T GPAG54G06 XH 41648 T HZ GH145 T
287. to the smaller diameter Use parameter DIAG2 to enter the final depth that you wish to reach with the cut off With pipes for example you do not need to cut off until you reach the center cutting off slightly more than the wall thickness of the pipe is sufficient Sequence 1 The tool first moves to the starting point calculated internally in the cycle at rapid traverse 2 The chamfer or radius is machined at the machining feedrate 3 Cut off down to depth DIAG1 is performed at the machining feedrate 4 Cut off is continued down to depth DIAG2 at reduced feedrate FF2 and reduced spindle speed SS2 5 The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse Programming example 1 N10 GO G90 230 X100 T5 D1 S1000 M3 Starting point before the beginning of the cycle N20 G95 F0 2 Specification of technology values N30 CYCLE92 60 30 40 2 2 1 800 200 3 1 1 300 0 Cycle call O dy 0 11000 N40 GO G90 X100 230 Next position N50 M02 End of program Programming example 2 The easiest way to part off a component is to use CYCLE92 The cycle can be found and parameterized from the main screen of the turning cycles 1 Select the desired operating area PROGRAM 2 Open the vertical softkey bar for available turning cycles Turn ere 3 Press this softkey to open the window for CYCLE 92 Parameterize the cycle as desired Lito WN J ERTE N MPF 1 MPF 1 Starting point along facing axis 5
288. ue 0 is possible Values s Internal parameter only the following values are possible Values 0 Longitudinal thread 10 Face thread 20 Taper thread Function The thread cutting cycle consists of three alternatives longitudinal thread face thread or taper thread Use the thread cutting cycle to produce cylindrical and tapered external and internal threads with constant lead in longitudinal and face machining The thread can be single or multiple With multiple threads the individual thread turns are machined one after the other The infeed is performed automatically you can choose between the variants constant infeed per cut or constant cutting cross section Right hand or left hand thread is determined by the direction of rotation of the spindle which must be programmed prior to the cycle start Both feed and spindle override are ineffective in the traversing blocks with thread See the following illustration for CYCLE99 Note To be able to use this cycle a speed controlled spindle with position measuring system is required Programming and Operating Manual Turning 186 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 Sequence Position reached prior to cycle start Starting position is any position from which the programmed thread starting point run in path can be approached without collision The cycle creates the following sequence of motions e Approach of the starting point determined in the cycle at the beginning of the run in pat
289. variable lead can be produced in one block with G34 or G35 e G34 Thread with linearly increasing lead e G35 Thread with linearly decreasing lead Both functions otherwise have the same functionality as G33 and have the same prerequisites G34 or G35 remain active until canceled by another instruction from this G group GO G1 G2 G3 G33 Thread lead e orK Starting thread lead in mm rev associated with X or Z axis Lead change In the block with G34 or G35 the address F contains the meaning of the lead change The lead mm per revolution changes per revolution e F lead change in mmM rev Note Outside of G34 G35 the address F also indicates the feed or the dwell time for G4 The values programmed there remain saved Determining F If you already know the starting and final lead of a thread you can calculate the thread lead change F to be programmed according to the following equation Ke Ka Fae immu 2xLe Explanation Ke Thread lead of the axis end point coordinate mm rev Ka Initial thread lead under I K progr mm U Le Thread length in mm Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 81 Programming G34 Z K F Cylindrical thread with increasing lead G35 X F Face thread with decreasing lead G35 Z X K F Taper thread with decreasing lead Programming example Table 8 1 Cylindrical thread subsequently with decreasing lead
290. wing illustration for external and internal thread with cylindrical thread External Internal Right hand or left hand thread Right hand or left hand thread is set with the rotation direction of the spindle M3 right M4 left To do this the rotation value must be programmed under address S or a rotation speed must be set Programming Remark Run in and run out paths must be taken into account for the thread lengths See the following illustration for programmable values for the thread with G33 Side view Top view Thread length with Starting point O degree marker of the End point run in and run out spindle encoder Lead or K Value is constant for the entire thread length of a G33 block Right or left hand thread with M3 or M4 with run in and run out Programming and Operating Manual Turning 78 6FC5398 5DP 10 0BA1 08 2013 See the following illustration for lead assignment for cylindrical tapered and transversed thread Cylinder thread G33 Za Ka Tapered thread Angle at the taper smaller than 45 G33 Z X K Lead K because the larger distance is in the Z axis Angle at the taper larger than 45 G33 Z X l Lead because the larger distance is in the X axis Face thread Tapered thread For tapered threads 2 axis values required the required lead address or K of the axis with the larger travel longer thread must be used A second lead is not defined Star
291. xis acceleration the axis is overloaded in terms of acceleration Alarm 22280 Programmed run in path too short is then issued for the thread run in The alarm is purely for information and has no effect on part program execution The run out path acts as a rounding clearance at the end of the thread This achieves a smooth change in the axis movement when retracting Programming DITS Run in path of thread for G33 DITE Run out path of thread for G33 Values for DITS and DITE or SD42010 THREAD_RAMP_DISP 1 lt O Starting braking of the feed axis is carried out with the configured acceleration Jerk according to current BRISK SOFT programming Abrupt starting braking of the feedrate axis on thread cutting gt 0 The run in run out path of the thread is predefined for G33 To avoid alarm 22280 the acceleration limits of the axis must be observed in case of very small run in and run out paths Note The value of SD42010 after reset program start is 1 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 80 6FC5398 5DP 10 0BA1 08 2013 See the following illustration for run in path and run out path with corner rounding Run out path Run in path Starting point Programming example N10 G54 N20 G90 GO Z100 X10 M3 S500 N30 G33 Z750 K5 SF 180 DITS 4 DITE 2 run in 4 mm run out 2 mm N40 GO X30 N50 GO X100 2100 N60 M5 N70 M30 8 5 3 Thread cutting with variable lead G34 G35 Functionality Threads with
292. y to start the standard simulation for the execution of the selected part program Note that the simulation function can be executed only when the control system is in AUTO operating mode The following describes the functions of the softkeys on the simulation main screen al e N MPF 44 MPF Reset 14 47 24 2612 12 66 SIEMENS auto Display all Delete window Cursor crs fine 2O QO660 m E Edit Shows the simulation track automatically Deletes the current simulation track Enters the lower level menu for block displaying Three Makes the cross hair move in large or small steps with displaying options are available the cursor All G17 All G18 All G19 Shows more options ee a See aikai j Enables the material removal aterial l aal simulation of a defined blank Zooms in the whole screen Sh Selects whether to show the blocks Ow blocks or not Zooms out the whole screen Returns to the program editor window 36 Programming and Operating Manual Turning 6FC5398 5DP10 0BA1 08 2013 5 2 Program control Operating sequence M MACHINE gt AUTO NC Prog cont Softkey functions Dry run feedrate 1 Select the desired operating area 2 Switch to AUTO mode 3 Press this softkey to open the lower level menu for program control 4 Press the corresponding vertical softkey to activate or deactivate t

Programming and Operating Manual - Service, Support

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents